Lexus IS350C, IS250C,IS350C 2013, IS250C Owner's manual

Lexus IS350C, IS250C,IS350C 2013, IS250C Owner's manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
Before driving
Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column.
2
When driving
Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.
3
Interior features
Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior
features for a comfortable driving experience.
4
Maintenance
and care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.
5
When trouble
arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire,
or is involved in an accident.
6
Vehicle
specifications
Detailed vehicle information.
7
For owners
Reporting safety defects for US owners, and seat belt, SRS
airbag and headlight aim instructions for Canadian owners
Index
Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual.
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Index
For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s
Manual” for information regarding the equipment listed below.
•
•
•
•
1
Navigation system
Air conditioning
Climate control
Rear view monitor system
Before driving
1-1. Key information
Keys ...................................................... 28
1-2. Opening, closing and locking
the doors and trunk
Smart access system with
push-button start .......................... 32
Wireless remote control .............. 44
Doors.................................................... 47
Trunk...................................................... 51
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)
Front seats.......................................... 55
Driving position memory .............. 61
Seat position memory ................... 65
Head restraints................................. 67
Seat belts ............................................ 70
Steering wheel.................................. 76
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror ................................................ 78
Outside rear view mirrors........... 79
2
• Audio/video system
• Rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogging
• Intuitive parking assist
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows and retractable
hardtop
Power windows................................ 82
Retractable hardtop....................... 86
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap........... 95
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system......... 98
Alarm.................................................. 100
Theft prevention labels ............... 103
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture ............. 104
SRS airbags ..................................... 106
Front passenger occupant
classification system.................... 117
Child restraint systems ............... 122
Installing child restraints............. 126
2
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle........................ 138
Engine (ignition) switch .............. 147
Automatic transmission................ 151
Turn signal lever ............................ 158
Parking brake ................................. 159
Horn.................................................... 160
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters ....................... 161
Indicators and warning
lights................................................. 167
Multi-information display............. 171
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control ................................ 190
Dynamic radar cruise
control............................................. 194
1
Intuitive parking assist ............... 208
Driving assist systems.................. 214
Hill-start assist control ............... 220
PCS
2
(Pre-Collision System) ........... 222
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage..................... 229 3
Vehicle load limits........................ 232
Winter driving tips ....................... 233
Trailer towing................................. 237
Dinghy towing ............................... 238 4
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers
5
Headlight switch............................ 176
Fog light switch .............................. 180
Windshield wipers and
washer............................................. 182
Headlight cleaner switch ........... 189
6
7
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3
Index
Interior features
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning
system ............................................ 242
Rear window and
outside rear view
mirror defoggers........................ 251
Windshield wiper de-icer......... 252
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system type ....................... 253
Using the radio.............................. 256
Using the CD player................... 264
Playing back MP3 and
WMA discs................................... 271
Operating an iPod....................... 279
Operating a USB memory....... 287
Optimal use of the audio
system ............................................ 296
Using the AUX port................... 298
Using the steering wheel
audio switches ........................... 300
4
3-3. Using the Bluetooth®
audio system
Bluetooth® audio system ........ 303
Using the Bluetooth® audio
system ........................................... 306
Operating a Bluetooth®
enabled portable player............ 311
Setting up a Bluetooth®
enabled portable player.......... 315
Bluetooth® audio system
setup ................................................ 321
3-4. Using the hands-free phone
system (for mobile phones)
Hands-free system for
mobile phones............................ 322
Using the hands-free system
(for mobile phones).................. 326
Making a phone call.................... 334
Setting a mobile phone............. 338
Security and system setup........ 343
Using the phone book................ 347
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list........................... 353
• Interior light ................................. 354
• Personal lights ............................ 354
3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features.............. 355
• Glove box .................................... 356
• Console box................................ 357
• Cup holders................................ 358
• Auxiliary box ................................ 361
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors......................................... 362
Vanity mirror.................................. 363
Clock................................................. 364
Satellite switches .......................... 365
Ashtrays .......................................... 368
Cigarette lighter........................... 369
Power outlet................................... 370
Seat heaters and ventilators ..... 371
Floor mat.......................................... 373
Trunk features................................ 374
Garage door opener.................. 377
Compass......................................... 383
Safety Connect ............................. 387
4
Maintenance and care
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior................... 396
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior..................... 401
1
2
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements ..... 404
General maintenance................ 406 3
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs ...................................... 409
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions................................... 410
Hood .................................................. 413 5
Positioning a floor jack................ 414
Engine compartment................... 416
Tires .................................................... 431
Tire inflation pressure.................. 441 6
Wheels ............................................. 445
Air conditioning filter.................. 447
Electronic key battery................ 449
7
Checking and replacing
fuses................................................. 451
Headlight aim ................................ 466
Light bulbs....................................... 468
5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5
Index
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an
emergency.................................. 550
When trouble arises
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers....................
If your vehicle needs to be
towed.............................................
If you think something is
wrong ............................................
Fuel pump shut off system .......
482
483
6
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.)..................... 552
Fuel information............................ 569
Tire information............................. 573
489
490
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on
or a warning buzzer
sounds... ......................................... 491
If a warning message is
displayed...................................... 500
If you have a flat tire (vehicles
with standard tires) .................... 513
If you have a flat tire (vehicles
with run-flat tires) ...................... 522
If the engine will not start .......... 524
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P.............................. 526
If you lose your keys .................... 527
If the electronic key does
not operate properly .............. 528
If the vehicle battery is
discharged ................................... 532
If your vehicle overheats .......... 536
If the vehicle becomes
stuck............................................... 539
If the retractable hardtop
does not close............................ 540
6
Vehicle specifications
6-2. Customization
Customizable features.............. 586
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize .......................... 590
7
For owners
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners........................... 592
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)................................... 593
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French).................................... 596
Headlight aim instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)................................... 604
Index
Abbreviation list .................................. 608
1
Alphabetical index................................ 610
What to do if... ...................................... 622
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
Pictorial index
Exterior
Windshield wipers P. 182
Retractable hardtop P. 86
Hood P. 413
Outside rear view mirrors
P. 79
Turn signal lights
P. 158
Fog lights P. 180
Daytime
running lights P. 178
8
Headlights P. 176
Turn signal lights P. 158
Parking lights P. 176
Side marker lights P. 176
Doors
P. 47
Fuel filler door P. 95
Rear window defogger P. 251
*1
Tail lights P. 176
Trunk
P. 51
Side marker lights P. 176
Tires
P. 431
●Rotation
P. 513, 522
●Replacement
●Inflation pressure P. 563
P. 573
●Information
Turn signal lights P. 158
*1: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
9
Pictorial index
Head restraints
Interior
AUX port P. 298
USB port P. 279, 287
Floor mat P. 373
SRS driver airbag P. 106
P. 67
Seat belts P. 70
SRS knee airbags P. 106
SRS front passenger
airbag P. 106
A
Front seats P. 55
Cup holders P. 358
Cup holders P. 358
Ashtray  P. 368
Console box P. 357
Power outlet P. 370
10
SRS side airbags P. 106
A
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror P. 78
Personal lights P. 354
“SOS” button  P. 387
Garage door opener switches P. 377
Compass  P. 383
Interior lights P. 354
Sun visors P. 362
Vanity mirrors P. 363
: If equipped
11
Pictorial index
Interior
B
Driving position memory switches  P. 61
Seat position memory switches  P. 65
Outside rear view mirror
switches P. 79
Window lock switch P. 82
Door lock switch
P. 47
Power window switches P. 82
12
C
Automatic transmission shift lever P. 151
Seat heater/ventilator switches  P. 371
Shift lock override button P. 526
Cigarette lighter  P. 369
Ashtray  P. 368
Auxiliary box  P. 361
: If equipped
13
Pictorial index
Headlight switch P. 176
Turn signal lever P. 158
Fog light switch P. 180
Instrument panel
Shift paddle switches
Gauges and meters
Multi-information display
Windshield wiper and washer switch
Engine (ignition) switch
Trunk opener main switch
Horn P. 160
P. 155
P. 161
P. 171
P. 182
P. 147
P. 51
Glove box P. 356
Tilt and telescopic steering control switch P. 76
Parking brake pedal P. 159
Hood lock release lever P. 413
Audio remote control switches P. 300
Inside door lock buttons
14
P. 47
*1
A
Without navigation system (type A)
Air conditioning
system
P. 242
Rear window and outside rear view mirror
defoggers P. 251
Audio
system
P. 253
Clock
P. 364
Security indicator
P. 98, 100
Emergency
flasher switch
P. 482
Without navigation system (type B)
Air conditioning
system
P. 242
Rear window and outside rear view mirror
defoggers P. 251
Audio
system
P. 253
Clock
P. 364
Security indicator
P. 98, 100
Emergency
flasher switch
P. 482
*1: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
15
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
A
With navigation system
Rear window and
outside rear view
mirror defoggers*2
Navigation
system*2
Clock P. 364
Security indicator
P. 98, 100
Air conditioning
system*2
Audio system*2
Emergency flasher
switch P. 482
16
B
Telephone switch P. 326
*1
“DISP” switch P. 172
Distance switch  P. 194
Cruise control switch  P. 190
Dynamic radar cruise control switch  P. 194
Talk switch P. 326
*1
C
ECT switch P. 152
Windshield wiper de-icer
switch  P. 252
: If equipped
*12: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
* : Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
17
Pictorial index
D
Instrument panel
Headlight cleaner switch  P. 189
Roof switch P. 86
All window control switch P. 82
Instrument panel light
control dial P. 162
Satellite switches P. 365
VSC off switch P. 216
Fuel filler door opener P. 95
Trunk opener
P. 51
: If equipped
18
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed
on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the
right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustration may differ from
your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming
from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation
leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are
currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant
these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement,
or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your
Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification
with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.
19
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as:
● Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
● Cruise control system
● Dynamic radar cruise control system
● Anti-lock brake system
● SRS airbag system
● Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special
instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.
20
Vehicle data recordings
Your Lexus is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record certain data, such as:
• Engine speed
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Shift position
The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with
which it is equipped. Furthermore, these computers do not record conversations,
sounds or pictures.
● Data usage
Lexus may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions,
conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the
vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle
owner
● Usage of data collected through Safety Connect/Lexus Enform (U.S. mainland
only)
If your Lexus has Safety Connect or Lexus Enform and if you have subscribed to
those services, please refer to the Safety Connect/Lexus Enform Telematics Subscription Service Agreement for information on data collected and its usage.
21
Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
22
● Disclosure of the EDR data
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:
• An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is
obtained
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit
However, if necessary, Lexus may:
• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive
chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left
as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of
the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified
service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may
include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
23
CAUTION
■ General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol
and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination,
which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers
or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts
the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can
result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or
others.
■ General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or
use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is
also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the cigarette
lighter, the windows, the retractable hardtop, or other features of the vehicle. In
addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be
fatal to children.
24
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is
ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the
risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its
equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must
not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment.
Symbols used in illustrations
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”,
“Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen.”
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.)
used to operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g.
a lid opens).
25
26
Before driving
1-1. Key information
Keys.............................................. 28
1-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors and
trunk
Smart access system with
push-button start................... 32
Wireless remote control......... 44
Doors ............................................ 47
Trunk .............................................. 51
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)
Front seats................................... 55
Driving position memory......... 61
Seat position memory.............. 65
Head restraints .......................... 67
Seat belts ..................................... 70
Steering wheel........................... 76
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror......................................... 78
Outside rear view mirrors...... 79
1
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows and retractable
hardtop
Power windows.......................... 82
Retractable hardtop ................ 86
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap ..... 95
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system.... 98
Alarm.......................................... 100
Theft prevention labels ......... 103
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture ....... 104
SRS airbags .............................. 106
Front passenger occupant
classification system.............. 117
Child restraint systems ......... 122
Installing child restraints....... 126
27
1-1. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart access
system with push-button start
(P. 32)
• Operating the wireless
remote control function
(P. 44)
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
■ Card key (if equipped)
Electronic key
Operating the smart access system with push-button start
(P. 32)
Mechanical key
28
1-1. Key information
Using the mechanical key
Take out the mechanical key.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery is depleted or the entry
function does not operate properly,
you will need the mechanical key.
(P. 528)
■ Card key
● The mechanical key that is stored inside the card key should be used only if a
problem arises, such as when the key does not operate properly.
● If it is difficult to take out the mechanical key, push down the lock release button
using a pen tip etc. If it is difficult to pull it out, use a coin etc.
● To store the mechanical key in the card
key, insert it inside while pressing the
lock release button.
29
1
Before driving
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the key
only has grooves on one side. If the
key cannot be inserted in a lock
cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt
to insert it.
1-1. Key information
● If the battery cover is not installed and
the battery falls out or if the battery was
removed because the key got wet, reinstall the battery with the positive terminal facing the Lexus emblem.
● The card key is not waterproof.
■ When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant
Turn the trunk opener main switch off and lock the glove box as circumstances
demand. (P. 51, 356)
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the
electronic key only.
■ Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that
a mechanical key is lost, a new key can be made at your Lexus dealer using the key
number plate. (P. 527)
■ When riding in an aircraft
When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any
buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an
electronic key in your bag etc, ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed
accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves
that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
30
1-1. Key information
NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
Observe the following.
1
● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to
such materials.
● Do not disassemble the electronic keys.
● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs,
audio systems and induction cookers, or medical electrical equipment, such as
low-frequency therapy equipment.
■ Precautions for handling the card keys
● Do not apply excess force when inserting the mechanical key to the card key.
Doing so may damage the card key.
● If the battery or card key terminals get wet, the battery may corrode and the card
key may stop working.
If the key is dropped into water, or if drinking water etc. is spilled on the key,
immediately remove the battery cover and wipe the battery and terminals. (To
remove the battery cover, lightly grasp it and pull.) If the battery is corroded, have
your Lexus dealer replace the battery.
● Do not crush the battery cover or use a screwdriver to remove the battery cover.
Forcibly removing the battery cover may bend or damage the key.
● If the battery cover is frequently removed, the battery cover may become loose.
● When installing the battery, make sure to check the direction of the battery.
Installing the battery in the wrong direction may cause the battery to deplete rapidly.
● The surface of the card key may be damaged, or its coating may peel off in the
following situations.
• The card key is carried together with hard objects, such as coins or keys.
• The card key is scraped with a sharp object, such as a tip of mechanical pencil.
• The surface of the card key is wiped with thinners or benzene.
31
Before driving
● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for a long period of time.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Smart access system with push-button start
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key (including the card key) on your person, for example in your
pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
Electronic key
Electronic key
Electronic key
Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 33)
Unlocks the trunk (P. 33)
Starts the engine (P. 147)
: If equipped
32
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Unlocking and locking the doors
Grip the driver’s door handle to
unlock the door. Grip the passenger’s door handle to unlock all the
doors.*
The door cannot be unlocked for 3
seconds after the door is locked.
*: The door unlock settings can be
changed. (P. 37)
Press the lock button to lock the
door.
Unlocking the trunk
Press the button to unlock the
trunk.
33
Before driving
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Antenna location and effective range
■ Antenna location
Antennas outside cabin
Antennas inside cabin
Antenna inside trunk
Antenna outside trunk
34
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
When locking or unlocking
the doors
When unlocking the trunk
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (70 cm) of
the trunk release button.
When starting the engine
or changing “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
modes
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
inside the vehicle.
35
1
Before driving
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is outside the vehicle, within about
2.3 ft. (70 cm) of either of the
outside door handles. (Only
the doors detecting the key
can be operated.)
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have
been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
■ Conditions affecting operation
The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle
may be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start from
operating properly:
(Ways of coping: P. 528)
● When the electronic key battery is depleted
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display,
airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wire-
less communication devices
● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metal-
lic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity
● When another wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
● When carrying or using the electronic key together with the following devices
that emit radio waves
• Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computer or personal digital assistant (PDA)
• Digital audio player
• Portable game system
● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear
window
● Immediately after the retractable hardtop is opened or closed
36
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks.
STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
STEP 2 When the indicator on the key surface is turned off, push and
hold
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When
changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds,
and repeat step 2.)
Multi-information
display
1
for approximately 5 seconds while pushing
Unlocking doors
Beep
Hold the driver's door handle
to unlock only the driver's
Exterior: Beeps three
door.
times
Hold the passenger’s door
Interior: Pings once
handle to unlock both side
doors.
Hold either door handle to
unlock both side doors.
Exterior: Beeps twice
Interior: Pings once
To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the electronic
key and open and close a door once after the settings have been changed. (If a
door is not opened within 60 seconds after
is pressed, the doors will be locked
again and the alarm will automatically be set.)
In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 100)
37
Before driving
,
or
on the key.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Battery-saving function
In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to prevent the
vehicle and electronic key batteries from discharging.
● When the entry function has not been used for a month or more
● When the electronic key has been left within approximately 3 ft. (1 m) of the
vehicle for 10 minutes or more
The system will resume operation when
● The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch.
● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control function.
(P. 44)
● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (P. 528)
■ Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The card key battery life is about a year
and a half.)
● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the engine
stops. (P. 510)
● The battery becomes depleted even if the electronic key is not used because
the key always receives radio waves. If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does not operate, or the detection area
becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. ( P. 449)
● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of
the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field.
•
•
•
•
•
•
38
TVs
Personal computers
Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
Induction cookers
Table lamps
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ To operate the system properly
● Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Actions such
as locking and unlocking the doors cannot be performed from outside the vehicle if the electronic key is inside the vehicle, even when the retractable hardtop
is open.
1
● Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the sys● Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key
may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The
alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not function.)
■ Note for the entry function
● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the
system may not operate properly in the following cases.
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the
ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the
rear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in
the glove box when the engine is started or “ENGINE START STOP” switch
modes are changed.
● Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door
pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will
become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside
the vehicle.
● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be
locked or unlocked by anyone.
● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the
engine if the electronic key is near the window.
● The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle,
such as in the rain or in a car wash. (The doors will automatically be locked after
approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)
● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
39
Before driving
tem from the outside of the vehicle.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key
is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the
entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)
● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle operation may prevent
the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original
position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.
■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of
the vehicle.
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the anti-theft system automatically locks the vehicle again.
■ Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warnings displayed on the
multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and unforeseeable
accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in
response to any warning indications on the multi-information display. (P. 500)
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only
alarms are sounded.
Alarm
Exterior alarm
sounds once for 2
seconds
Situation
Correction procedure
Tried to lock the doors using
the entry function while the
electronic key is still inside
the passenger compartment
Retrieve the electronic
key from the passenger
compartment and lock
the doors again.
Closed the trunk while the
electronic key is still inside
and both side doors are
locked
Retrieve the electronic
key from the trunk and
close the trunk lid.
Tried to exit the vehicle with
the electronic key and lock
Exterior alarm
sounds once for 60 the doors without first turning
the “ENGINE START STOP”
seconds
switch OFF
40
Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and lock the doors
again.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Alarm
Situation
Correction procedure
Exterior alarm
Tried to lock the vehicle using Close all of the doors
sounds once for 10 the entry function while a
and lock the doors
seconds
door is open
again.
Tried to open the door and
exit the vehicle without shifting the shift lever to P
Shift the shift lever to P.
Before driving
Interior alarm
sounds continuously
1
Switched to ACCESSORY
mode while the driver's door
is open (Opened the driver's
Close the driver's door.
door when the “ENGINE
Interior alarm pings START STOP” switch is in
continuously
ACCESSORY mode.)
Turned the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF while the Close the driver's door.
driver's door is open
If the electronic key is removed from the vehicle without any of the doors being
opened, such as through the open retractable hardtop, these warning functions
may not operate properly.
■ If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: Use the mechanical key.
(P. 528)
● Starting the engine: P. 530
■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 449
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
It is possible to deactivate the operation signals of the system, such as the emergency flashers. (Customizable features P. 586)
41
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF-1
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
42
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away
● User of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and
implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical
devices.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details for disabling the entry function.
43
1
Before driving
from the smart access system antennas. (P. 34)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry
function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency
of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves. Then, consult your doctor
to see if you should disable the entry function.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Wireless remote control
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle and
the trunk from outside the vehicle.
Locks both side doors
Unlocks both side doors
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other door.
Opens the windows (push
and hold)*
Unlocks the trunk
(push and hold)
Sounds alarm
(push and hold) (P. 45)
*: This setting must be customized
at your Lexus dealer.
■ Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the
doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
Trunk:
A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.
Windows: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows are operating.
■ Door lock buzzer
If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds if an attempt to lock the door is made.
Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.
■ Alarm
Using the wireless remote control to lock the doors will set the alarm system.
44
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Panic mode
When
is pushed for longer than about
one second, an alarm will sound for about 60
seconds and the vehicle lights will flash to
deter any person from trying to break into or
damage your vehicle.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
P. 38
■ Security feature
P. 40
■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 449
■ Conditions affecting operation
P. 36
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. trunk unlocking function) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 586)
45
Before driving
To stop the alarm, push any button on the
wireless remote control.
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Certification for wireless remote control
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQ14ABK
FCC ID: HYQ14AEM
FCC ID: HYQ14ABS
FCC ID: HYQ14ABB
FCC ID: HYQ13BZW
FCC ID: HYQ13BZH
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
NOTE:
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt
à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.
46
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless
remote control or door lock switch.
■ Entry function
P. 33
1
Before driving
■ Wireless remote control
P. 44
■ Door lock switch
Locks both side doors
Unlocks both side doors
■ Inside lock button
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The both side doors can be
opened by pulling the inside
handle even if the lock buttons
are in the lock position.
47
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Locking the doors from the outside without a key
The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left
inside the vehicle.
Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be detected
correctly and the door may be locked.
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or cancelled:
Function
Operation
Shift position linked door
locking function
Shifting the shift lever out of P when the engine
is running locks both side doors.
Shift position linked door
unlocking function
Shifting the shift lever to P when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON
mode unlocks both side doors.
Both side doors are locked when the vehicle
Speed linked door locking
speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or
function
higher.
Driver's door linked door
unlocking function
48
Both side doors are unlocked when the driver's
door is opened within approximately 45 seconds after turning the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch OFF.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Setting and canceling the functions
To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below:
STEP 1
The shift lever and switch positions
corresponding to the desired function to be set are shown as follows.
Use the same procedure to cancel
the function.
Function
Shift position linked door locking
function
Shift position linked door unlocking function
Shift lever position
Driver’s door lock
switch position
P
Speed linked door locking function
Driver's door linked door unlocking
function
N
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, both side doors are
locked and then unlocked.
49
1
Before driving
STEP 2
Close both side doors and switch the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch to IGNITION ON mode. (Perform the step 2 within 20
seconds.)
Shift the shift lever to P or N, press
and hold the driver's door lock
switch (
or
) for about
5 seconds then release.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Side window open/close function linked to door operation
When a door is opened, its window opens slightly. When a door is closed, its window closes completely.
■ Impact detection door lock release system
In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, both side doors are
unlocked. Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however,
the system may not operate.
■ Using the mechanical key
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 528)
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 586)
CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Always use a seat belt.
● Always lock both side doors.
● Ensure that both side doors are properly closed.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers may be thrown out of the vehicle,
resulting in death or serious injury.
50
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Trunk
The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or wireless
remote control.
■ Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle
Press the opener switch.
1
Before driving
■ Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle
Entry function
P. 33
Wireless remote control
P. 44
Locking the trunk opener feature
Turn the trunk opener main switch
in the glove box off to disable the
trunk opener.
On
Off
The trunk lid cannot be opened
even with the wireless remote control or the entry function.
51
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Trunk light
When the trunk light switch is set to on, the trunk light turns on when the trunk is
opened.
On
Off
■ Trunk handle
Use the trunk handle when closing the trunk.
■ Internal trunk release lever
The trunk lid can be opened by pulling on the
glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside
of the trunk lid.
The lever will continue to glow for some time
after the trunk lid is closed.
■ Using the mechanical key
The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (P. 528)
■ When the retractable hardtop is operating
The trunk lid cannot be opened. Wait until the retractable hardtop is fully opened or
closed before opening the trunk lid.
52
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Which key to the vehicle is to leave with a parking attendant after disabling the
trunk opener main switch
P. 30
1
CAUTION
● Keep the trunk lid closed while driving.
If the trunk lid is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or luggage in
the trunk may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a serious
health hazard. Make sure to close the trunk lid before driving.
● Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk
lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, causing an accident.
● Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they
are susceptible to death or serious injury.
■ When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not allow children to enter the trunk.
If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could overheat or suffocate.
● Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.
Doing so may cause the trunk lid to operate unexpectedly, or cause the child’s
hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.
53
Before driving
■ Caution while driving
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ Using the trunk
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury.
● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening
it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened.
● When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the sur-
rounding area is safe.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the
trunk is about to open or close.
● Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may
move abruptly in strong wind.
● The trunk lid may suddenly shut if it is not
opened fully. It is more difficult to open or
close the trunk lid on an incline than on a
level surface, so beware of the trunk lid
unexpectedly opening or closing by
itself. Make sure that the trunk lid is fully
open and secure before using the trunk.
● When closing the trunk lid, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc. from
being caught.
● When closing the trunk lid, make sure to
press it lightly on its outer surface. If the
trunk handle is used to fully close the
trunk lid, it may result in hands or arms
being caught.
● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid.
Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to suddenly shut again
after it is opened.
54
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
Type A
1
Before driving
Type B
Seat position switch
Seatback angle switch
Seat cushion (front) angle switch
Vertical height adjustment switch
Lumbar support switch
Seatback fold lever
Entering or exiting the rear seats
55
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Entering/exiting the rear seats
Type A  Switch-operated “Front, Fold & Return” Seat
Moving the front seat forward or backward using the switch enables
passengers to enter or exit the rear seats smoothly and easily.
■ When entering/exiting the rear seats
Press the fold switch once. The
seatback of the front seat will fold
and the seat will move forward.
For safety reasons, the seat will be
stopped at a position slightly
behind the most-forward position.
To move the seat further to the
most-forward position, press and
hold the switch again after the seat
is stopped.
56
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Returning the front seats to the original position (auto return function)
Press the return switch once. The
seatback of the front seat will
return to the upright position and
the seat will move backward.*
After the seat is returned to the
original position, pressing and
holding the return switch moves
the seat back further.
*: The return function can be set to
activate only while the switch is
being pressed. (P. 365)
57
Before driving
For safety reasons, if the front seat
was originally positioned close to
the rear seat, the seat will be
stopped at a position slightly in
front of the original position. To
return the seat to its original position, press the return switch again.
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Type B  Seat slide switches (passenger’s seat only)
Press and hold the switch to move
STEP 1
the seat forward.
STEP 2
58
Fold the seatback using either of
the seatback fold levers.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Switch-operated “Front, Fold & Return” Seat
● When the auto return function is on, a buzzer will sound intermittently while the
switch-operated “Front, Fold & Return” seat is in motion.
● If any seat adjustment switch or driving position memory switch is operated
● The switch-operated “Front, Fold & Return” seat cannot operate when:
• A person or item of luggage is on the seat or the seat belt is fastened.
• The vehicle is moving.
● Operation of the Switch-operated “Front, Fold & Return” Seat will stop if:
• The “Front, Fold & Return” seat switch is pressed again.
• Any seat adjustment switch or driving position memory switch is pressed.
• A person enters the seat or an item of luggage is put on the seat (during forward movement only).
• The vehicle starts off.
• The seat belt is fastened (during forward movement only).
■ When the seatback is fully reclined
Do not use the seatback fold lever to raise the front seat as this may prevent the
seatback from locking in place.
If the seatback will not lock, press and hold the seatback angle switch forward for a
few seconds to change the memorized seat position. Raise the seatback by hand
and check that it locks in position as normal.
59
Before driving
after the seat is moved to the forward and fold position using the “Front, Fold &
Return” seat switch, the seat cannot be returned using the “Front, Fold & Return”
seat switch. Use a switch other than the “Front, Fold & Return” seat switch to
return the seat.
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment
Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to reduce
the risk of sliding under the lap belt.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
■ Retuning the folded seatback to the upright position
Pull the seatback up by hand.
If the seatback angle switch is used to return the seatback, the seat may not be
locked in position, resulting in an accident.
After returning the seat, rock the seat back and forth to ensure that it is securely
locked in position.
■ When the vehicle is moving
Do not operate the seatback fold levers.
■ Switch-operated “Front, Fold & Return” Seat
● Before operating the switch, ensure that no surrounding passengers or objects
are caught in the seat. Seat operation will not stop automatically, even if something becomes caught in the seat. This may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not operate the switch while the vehicle is moving.
60
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Driving position memory (driver’s seat)
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat, steering
wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be memorized and recalled with
the touch of a button. It is also possible to set this function to activate automatically when the doors are unlocked.
Three different driving positions can be entered into memory.
1
Before driving
■ Entering a position to memory
STEP 1 Switch to IGNITION ON mode.
STEP 2 Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view
mirrors to the desired positions.
Push the “SET” button, then
STEP 3
within 3 seconds push button
“1”, “2” or “3” until you hear a
beep.
If the selected button has
already been preset, the previously recorded position will be
overwritten.
■ Recalling the memorized position
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Switch to IGNITION ON mode.
To recall the memorized position, push button “1”, “2” or “3”
until you hear a beep.
: If equipped
61
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation
Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before performing
the following.
Using the wireless remote control
STEP 1 Close the driver's door and turn the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch OFF.
While the desired button (“1”, “2”
STEP 2
or “3”) press
on the wireless
remote control until the signal
beeps.
The driving position is recalled
when the driver's door is unlocked
using the entry function or wireless
remote control and the driver’s
door is opened.
To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, open and close a door
once after a driving position has been recorded. (If a door is not opened
within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and
the alarm will automatically be set.)
In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 100)
62
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Using the door lock switch
Carry only the key (including the card key) to which you want to link
the driving position. If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving
position cannot be linked properly.
STEP 1
The driving position is recalled
when the driver's door is unlocked
using the entry function or wireless
remote control and the driver's
door is opened.
: If equipped
63
1
Before driving
STEP 2
Close the driver's door and turn the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch OFF.
While pressing the desired button
(“1”, “2” or “3”), press the lock or
unlock side on the driver’s door
lock switch until the signal beeps.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Canceling the linked door unlock operation
STEP 1 Close the driver's door and turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
OFF.
STEP 2 Using the wireless remote control: While pushing the “SET” button, press
on the wireless remote control until the signal beeps.
Using the door lock switch: While pressing the “SET” button, press the
lock or unlock side on the door lock switch until the signal beeps.
■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF
Memorized positions (except for the steering wheel positions) can be activated up
to 180 seconds after the driver's door is opened and another 60 seconds after it is
closed again, even after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
■ To cancel seat position recall
Perform any of the following operations.
● Push the “SET” button.
● Push button “1”, “2” or “3”.
● Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall).
■ If the battery is disconnected
The memorized positions are erased when the battery is disconnected.
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or
child restraint system, or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.
64
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat position memory (front passenger’s seat)
Your preferred front passenger seat position can be memorized and
recalled with the touch of a button.
Three different seat positions can be entered into memory.
1
Before driving
■ Entering a position to memory
STEP 1 Switch to IGNITION ON mode.
STEP 2 Adjust the front passenger seat to the desired position.
Push the “SET” button, then
STEP 3
within 3 seconds push button
“1”, “2” or “3” until you hear a
beep.
If the selected button has
already been preset, the previously recorded position will be
overwritten.
■ Recalling the memorized position
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
To recall the memorized position, push button “1”, “2” or “3”
until you hear a beep.
: If equipped
65
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Operating the seat position memory after turning the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch OFF
Memorized position can be activated up to 180 seconds after the front passenger
door is opened, even after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
■ To cancel seat position recall
Perform any of the following operations.
● Push the “SET” button.
● Push button “1”, “2” or “3”.
● Adjust the seat position using the switches.
■ If the battery is disconnected
The memorized positions are erased when the battery is disconnected.
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or
child restraint system.
66
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Vertical adjustment (front seats)
Up
1
Pull the head restraints up.
Lock release button
Before driving
Down
Push the head restraint down
while pushing the lock release
button.
Folding operation (rear seats)
Pull the lever.
When reversing etc., folding
down the head restraints
enables a better view of the area
behind the vehicle.
To return the head restraints,
raise them by hand.
67
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Removing the head restraints (front seats)
Pull the head restraint up while pressing the
lock release button.
■ Installing the head restraints (front seats)
Align the head restraint with the installation
holes and push it down to the lock position.
Press and hold the lock release button when
lowering the head restraint.
■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints (front seats)
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
68
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions when the head restraints are in use. Failure to do
so may result in death or serious injury.
1
■ Front head restraints
● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are
locked in position.
● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
■ Rear head restraints
● Do not sit in the rear seats with the head restraints in the folded position.
● Do not fold the head restraints when passengers are seated in the rear seats.
● Do not allow passengers to sit on the folded head restraints.
NOTICE
■ Rear head restraints
Do not press down excessively on the folded head restraints as doing so may cause
damage.
69
Before driving
● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the
vehicle.
■ Correct use of the seat belts
● Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not come
into contact with the neck or
slide off the shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips.
● Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight and
well back in the seat.
● Do not twist the seat belt.
■ Fastening and releasing the seat belt
Fastening the belt
Push the tab into the buckle until
a clicking sound is heard.
Releasing the belt
Press the release button.
Release button
70
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seat belt guide
When fastening a front seat belt,
always ensure that it passes
through the seat belt guide.
Rear seat belt holder & guide
■ Rear seat belt holder
When the rear seat belts are not in
use, secure the belts in the holder
position. When in use, release the
belts from the holder position.
■ Rear seat belt guide
If the shoulder belt sits close to the occupant’s neck, secure the seat belt
in the guide position.
71
Before driving
When entering or exiting the
rear seats, release the seat belt
from the guide.
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal collision.
The pretensioner may not activate
in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a side impact, a rear impact
or a vehicle rollover.
Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-collision system)
If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the precollision system will retract the seatbelt, thus enhancing the effectiveness
of the seat belt pretensioner in a crash.
The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or loses control of the vehicle. (P. 222)
■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if
you lean forward or pull out the belt too quickly. Allow the belt to fully retract, and
then slowly extend the belt. If the belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor, firmly
pull the belt and release it. You will then be able to smoothly pull the belt out of the
retractor.
■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even
slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is
used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully
retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 126)
72
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt
in the proper way. (P. 70)
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only a
pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.
■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle are principally designed for persons of adult size.
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 122)
● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt,
follow the instructions on P. 70 regarding seat belt usage.
■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the
first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■ Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely
because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from
your Lexus dealer free of charge.
73
1
Before driving
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in
the same manner as other occupants. Extend
the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest.
Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the
abdominal area.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failing to do so may cause death or severe injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more
than one person at once, including children.
● Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat
belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
● Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seating
position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight
and well back in the seats.
● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■ When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted
around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could
result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut
the belt.
■ Seat belt pretensioners
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat. Doing so
will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting
the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the
front passenger’s seat may not activate in the event of a collision.
● If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case,
the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.
■ When using the seat belt guide
Always make sure that the belt is not twisted, and runs freely through the guide.
■ Before fastening the rear seat belt
Release the seat belt holder.
74
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed
in the door.
1
● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts.
● Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus
dealer.
● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in
a serious accident, even if there's no obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts.
Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly resulting in
death or serious injury.
■ Using a seat belt extender
● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because
the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by
another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally
intended.
NOTICE
■ When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
75
Before driving
Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot
protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.
Up
Down
Away from the driver
Toward the driver
Auto tilt away
When the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned OFF, the
steering wheel returns to its
stowed position by moving up and
away to enable easier driver entry
and exit.
Switching to ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode will return
the steering wheel to the original
position.
76
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ The steering wheel can be adjusted when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■ Automatic adjustment of the steering position (vehicles with driving position
memory)
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
It is possible to deactivate the auto tilt-away function.
(Customizable features P. 586)
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
77
Before driving
A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically
by the driving position memory. (P. 61)
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles
behind and automatically reduce the reflected light.
Turns automatic mode on/off
The indicator comes on when
automatic mode is turned on.
The anti-glare mirror default
mode is automatic. The antiglare mirror is automatically set
to automatic whenever the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch
is turned to IGNITION ON
mode.
■ To prevent sensor error
To ensure that the sensors operate properly,
do not touch or cover them.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death
or serious injury.
78
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Outside rear view mirrors
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch.
Select a mirror to adjust
(“L”: left or “R”: right)
Adjust the mirror up, down,
in, or out using the switch
1
Before driving
■ The mirrors can be adjusted when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■ When the mirrors are fogged up
Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (P. 251)
■ Folding back the mirrors
Push back in the direction of the vehicle's
rear.
■ One-touch adjustment of the mirror angle
(vehicles with driving position memory)
A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and adjusted automatically
by the driving position memory. (P. 61)
79
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Linked mirror function when reversing (vehicles with driving position memory)
The outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle
is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. However, this function will
not operate when the mirror select switch is in the neutral position (between “L” and
“R”).
■ Auto anti-glare function (if equipped)
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside
rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (P. 78)
■ Rain-clearing mirrors (if equipped)
When water droplets collects on the mirror surface, for example when it rains, the
rain-clearing (hydrophilic) effect of the mirrors causes the droplets to be spread out
into a film making the rear view clearer.In the following cases, the rain-clearing
effect will be reduced temporarily, but will return after 1 or 2 days' exposure to
direct sunlight.
● After wiping dirt off the mirrors
● When the mirrors fog up
● After waxing your vehicle in an automatic car wash
● After your vehicle has been parked for a long period in underground parking
lots, etc. where there is no direct sunlight.
80
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■ When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded back.
● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■ When the mirror defoggers are operating
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn
you.
NOTICE
■ If the mirrors become iced up
In order to retain the rain-clearing properties of the mirror, do not attempt to scrape
the ice off. Instead, remove it by turning on the mirror defoggers or by applying
warm water.
81
Before driving
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
1
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and retractable hardtop
Power windows
The power windows can be opened and closed using the following
switches.
Using the individual window switches
Closing
One-touch closing (front
windows)*
Opening
One-touch opening*
*: To stop the window partway,
operate the switch in the opposite direction.
Using the all window control switch
Closing
Opening
One-touch opening*
*: To stop the window partway,
operate the switch in the opposite direction.
82
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and retractable hardtop
Lock switch
Press the switch down to lock the
passenger window switches.
■ The power windows can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Door lock linked window operation
The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control. (P. 44)
■ Front side window open/close function linked to rear side window operation
When a rear side window is opened, the adjacent front side window will also open
slightly. The front side window cannot be closed completely while the rear side window is open.
■ Operating the power windows after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
OFF
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either side door is opened.
■ Jam protection function (front windows)
If an object becomes caught between the window and the body, window travel is
stopped and the window is opened slightly.
83
1
Before driving
Use this switch to prevent children
from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and retractable hardtop
■ When the power window does not close normally
If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot be
closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch on the relevant door.
● After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the power win-
dow switch in the one-touch closing position while the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
● If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation
explained above, initialize the function by performing the following procedure.
STEP 1 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. Con-
tinue holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the window has
closed.
STEP 2 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position. Con-
tinue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has
opened completely.
STEP 3 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position once
again. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has closed.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning.
If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after performing the
above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Window operation during retractable hardtop operation
When the retractable hardtop is partially open (during opening or closing operation), the power window switches are disabled.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings of the linked wireless remote control operation can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 586)
84
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and retractable hardtop
CAUTION
■ Closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
1
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a
● Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some
instances, even death.
■ Jam protection function
● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function
intentionally.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the window fully closes.
85
Before driving
position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and retractable hardtop
Retractable hardtop
The retractable hardtop can be opened and closed using a switch.
Opening the retractable hardtop
Press and hold the switch until “COMPLETE” is shown on the display.
The side windows will open as retractable hardtop operation is performed.
A buzzer will sound when operation is complete.
Closing the retractable hardtop
Pull up and hold the switch until “COMPLETE” is shown on the display.
The side windows will open as retractable hardtop operation is performed.
A buzzer will sound when operation is complete.
Continuing to hold the switch up after operation is complete closes the
side windows.
Retractable hardtop status display (P. 88)
86
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and retractable hardtop
Luggage cover
The luggage cover is used to ensure that there is enough space for the
retractable hardtop to be stored.
Proper installation of the luggage cover enables retractable hardtop
operation.
STEP 2
Pull the board of the luggage
cover toward you to unhook the
hooks.
Pull the luggage cover further until
the tabs on the sides of the cover fit
securely into the holders on the
sides of the trunk.
Make sure the upper part of the
board is securely positioned in the
holders.
STEP 3
Fit the tabs on the bottom of the
luggage cover into the holders on
the floor of the trunk.
Make sure the lower part of the
board is securely positioned in the
holders on the floor.
87
Before driving
STEP 1
1
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and retractable hardtop
Retractable hardtop status display
Information regarding the retractable hardtop is shown on the multiinformation display.
■ Roof Function Status Indicator
This indicator shows the operation status of the retractable hardtop.
Operation without interruption
During operation
The bar display shows the progress of the operation of the retractable
hardtop.
Completion of operation
When operation is finished, “COMPLETE” will be shown on the display.
88
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and retractable hardtop
Operation with interruption
1
Before driving
During operation
The bar display shows the progress of the operation of the retractable
hardtop.
Interruption of operation
Operation of the retractable hardtop will be suspended if the switch is
released, the operating conditions are no longer met or there is a malfunction. (P. 91)
Resumption of operation
Operating the switch again causes the retractable hardtop to resume
operation.
The bar display will not be shown after operation is suspended.
Completion of operation
When operation is finished, “COMPLETE” will be shown on the display.
■ Advice and warning message display
A message will be displayed if operating conditions for the retractable
hardtop are not met or if there is a malfunction in the system.
(P. 503)
89
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and retractable hardtop
Retractable hardtop operation control linked to the intuitive parking
assist (vehicles with an intuitive parking assist)
This function detects if there is an obstruction behind the vehicle and regulates retractable hardtop operation according to the vehicle’s distance
from that obstruction.
This function is merely designed to assist the driver and is not a guarantee
of the safety of the area behind the vehicle. The driver should always
check the vehicle’s surroundings with their own eyes before operating the
retractable hardtop.
■ Operation controls according to each detection area
Area within approximately
1.2 ft. (35 cm) of the vehicle
Area approximately
1.2 ft. (35 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm)
away from the vehicle
Areas within approximately
0.8 ft. (25 cm) of the vehicle
Areas approximately
0.8 ft. (25 cm) to 1.3 ft. (37.5
cm) away from the vehicle
This function only operates in the
areas indicated in the illustration.
Therefore, obstructions too close
to the sensors cannot be detected.
● If an obstruction is detected in area or when the switch is operated
A buzzer will sound and a message will be shown in the multi-information display to alert the driver.
If the switch is held up or down for 3 seconds while the message is being displayed, retractable hardtop operation will start normally.
90
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and retractable hardtop
● If an obstruction is detected in area or when the switch is operated
A buzzer will sound twice and a message will be shown in the multiinformation display. Retractable hardtop operation will not activate.
If an obstruction is detected in area or while the trunk lid is operating, a buzzer will sound twice and a message will be shown in the multiinformation display. Retractable hardtop operation will be suspended for
safety reasons.
Ensure that no obstructions are near the vehicle and then operate the
switch again.
■ Operating conditions
● The vehicle is stopped.
● The engine is running. (Operation while the engine is not running is possible if
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode, but for optimal
operation the engine should be running.)
● The trunk lid is closed.
● The trunk opener main switch is on. (P. 51)
● The luggage cover in the trunk is properly set. (P. 87)
When the vehicle is on an incline or an uneven surface, the retractable hardtop may
not activate properly.
If the intuitive parking assist detect an obstruction behind the vehicle, the retractable hardtop may not operate.
■ Switch operation when the operating conditions are not met
Even if all of the operating conditions are not met, when the switch is operated with
the vehicle stopped and the retractable hardtop fully closed, the following operations can be performed:
● Holding the switch up closes all the side windows.
● Holding the switch down opens all the side windows.
91
1
Before driving
If the switch is released and then operated again within 2 seconds, the buzzer
will sound again and a message will be shown in the multi-information display
to alert the driver. If the switch is held up or down for 3 seconds, retractable
hardtop operation will start normally.
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and retractable hardtop
■ When a message appears and the retractable hardtop does not operate
Check the message contents and perform the recommended procedure, then
operate the switch again. (P. 503)
■ Retractable hardtop operation control linked to the intuitive parking assist
● This function will activate when the intuitive parking assist is on. (P. 365)
● Once the trunk lid has been fully opened, this function will be disabled.
● The trunk lid can be closed even when an obstruction is detected by operating
the retractable hardtop operation switch in the opposite direction.
■ If the intuitive parking assist is dirty or malfunctioning
If a message is shown in the multi-information display indicating that a sensor is malfunctioning or needs to be cleaned, the retractable hardtop cannot be operated
normally. To start retractable hardtop operation, turn the intuitive parking assist off
and operate the switch for the retractable hardtop again, or hold the switch up or
down for 6 seconds or more. In this case, retractable hardtop operation control
linked to the intuitive parking assist-sensor will not function.
■ Customization that can be configured at a Lexus dealer
Setting of the intuitive parking assist linked function can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 586)
92
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and retractable hardtop
CAUTION
■ When opening or closing the retractable hardtop
Observe the following precautions.
1
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
not have any part of their body in a position
where it could be caught when a retractable hardtop is being operated. If someone
becomes caught in the mechanism, release
the switch immediately to stop operation.
● As parts of the trunk move, ensure that no
one is near the vehicle while the retractable
hardtop is operating.
● Keep hands away from the hinges and rail parts of the retractable hardtop as well
as any other part of the hardtop linkage mechanism.
● Do not operate the retractable hardtop in strong winds.
● Do not disconnect the battery when the retractable hardtop is partially open.
■ While the vehicle is moving
● The vehicle should never be driven with the retractable hardtop partially open.
● Do not allow passengers to stand on seats, sit on the package tray or lean over
the vehicle.
■ When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to operate the retractable hardtop.
Doing so may cause the child or another person to become caught in the retractable hardtop mechanism, resulting in death or serious injury.
93
Before driving
● Check to make sure that all passengers do
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and retractable hardtop
NOTICE
■ Precautions for opening/closing the retractable hardtop
● Before operating the retractable hardtop, make sure that the areas 2.3 ft. (70
cm) above the roof and 1.2 ft. (35 cm) behind the rear bumper is clear of obstructions.
● Do not put any items or packages on the package tray even if they are extremely
small.
● Do not store luggage on or allow anyone to sit on the retractable hardtop.
● When the outside temperature is -4°F (-20°C) or below or if the side windows
are frozen shut, do not open or close the retractable hardtop.
● Do not open the retractable hardtop if it is wet. Possible interior water damage,
water stains or mildew may result.
● When opening or closing the retractable hardtop, turn the rear window defog-
gers off.
● Do not leave the vehicle for an extended period of time with an open or close
operation incomplete.
● Do not open the trunk lid while the retractable hardtop is operating.
● If the retractable hardtop is operated repeatedly within a short period of time, the
motor protection circuit may activate, causing the roof switch to be disabled. In
this case, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode or off
and, after waiting for a while, perform the procedure again.
● Do not place anything on or under the luggage cover.
● The luggage cover should be attached securely. Protruding luggage may inter-
fere with the proper operation of the retractable hardtop, causing it to become
damaged.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not operate the retractable hardtop repeatedly when the engine is off.
94
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.
■ Before refueling the vehicle
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and ensure that both
side doors and windows are closed.
1
STEP 1
Press the opener switch.
STEP 2
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to
open.
STEP 3
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
Before driving
■ Opening the fuel tank cap
95
1-5. Refueling
Closing the fuel tank cap
When replacing the fuel tank cap,
turn it until a clicking sound is
heard.
After releasing your hand, the cap
will turn slightly to the opposite
direction.
■ Fuel types
Use unleaded gasoline. (Octane rating 91 [Research Octane Number 96] or
higher)
■ Fuel tank capacity (reference)
17.2 gal. (65 L, 14.3 Imp. gal.)
■ When the fuel filler door opener is inoperable
The lever can be used to open the fuel filler
door if the fuel filler door cannot be opened
using the inside switch because the battery is
discharged or for any other reason.
96
1-5. Refueling
CAUTION
■ Refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may
result in death or serious injury.
1
● Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static electricity.
● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until
the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to
come close to an open fuel tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
■ When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.
Failure to do so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Failing to do so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted
surface.
97
Before driving
Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel vapors to
ignite.
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine
from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's
on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The indicator light flashes after
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been turned OFF to
indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing
after the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch has been turned
to ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode to indicate that the
system has been canceled.
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key
with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
98
1-6. Theft deterrent system
■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1
For vehicles sold in Canada
CAUTION
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation
of the system cannot be guaranteed.
99
1
Before driving
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Alarm
The system sounds the alarm and flashes the lights when forcible entry is
detected.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is
set.
● A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other
than using the entry function, wireless remote door lock function
or mechanical key.
● The hood is opened.
■ Setting the alarm system
If the retractable hardtop is
open, close it.
Close the doors, trunk and
hood, and lock both side doors.
The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from
being on to flashing when the
system is set.
■ Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm.
● Unlock the doors or trunk using the entry function, wireless
remote door lock function or mechanical key.
● Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode, or start the engine. (The alarm will be
deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)
100
1-6. Theft deterrent system
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
■ Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the
following.
1
Before driving
● Nobody is in the vehicle.
● The windows and retractable hardtop are closed before the alarm is set.
● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations.
Stopping the alarm deactivates the system.
● A person inside the vehicle opens a door,
the trunk or hood.
● The battery is recharged or replaced
when the vehicle is locked.
101
1-6. Theft deterrent system
■ When the battery is disconnected
Be sure to deactivate the alarm system.
If the battery is disconnected before deactivating the alarm system, the alarm may
be triggered when the battery is reconnected.
■ Alarm-operated door lock
● When the alarm is operating, the doors are locked automatically to prevent
intruders.
● Do not leave the key inside the vehicle when the alarm is operating, and make
sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the battery.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation
of the system cannot be guaranteed.
102
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.)
These labels are attached to the
vehicle to reduce vehicle theft
by facilitating the tracing and
recovery of parts from stolen
vehicles. Do not remove under
penalty of law.
1
Before driving
103
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive in a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (P. 55)
Adjust the position of the seat
forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached
and
easily
depressed to the extent
required. (P. 55)
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily operable. (P. 55)
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest.
(P. 76)
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (P. 67)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P. 70)
104
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ While driving
● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.
1
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
● Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and
stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment
mechanism may also be damaged.
■ Adjusting the seat position:
● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are
not injured by the moving seat.
● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
105
Before driving
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the
effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or
serious injury to the driver or passenger.
1-7. Safety information
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of
severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They
work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious
injury.
SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components.
Knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection.
SRS side airbags
Head and torso side airbags
Can help protect the head and torso of the front seat occupants.
106
1-7. Safety information
Airbag system components
1
Before driving
Knee airbags
Front passenger airbag
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator lights
Side airbags
Side airbag sensors
Seat belt pretensioners and
force limiters
SRS warning light
Driver airbag
Driver's seat belt buckle switch
Driver's seat position sensor
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
Airbag sensor assembly
Front passenger occupant
classification system
(ECU and sensors)
Front airbag sensors
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information
obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram
above. This information includes crash severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills
the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.
107
1-7. Safety information
■ SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors,
side airbag sensor assemblies, driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle
switch, front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors), “AIR
BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger’s seat
belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (P. 492)
■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating)
SRS airbag.
● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel, airbag cover and inflator) as well as
the front seats may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
● The windshield may crack.
● For Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event of a
severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emergency call to
the response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location (without needing to
push the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants
to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants
are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency services. (P. 387)
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)
● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the
set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or
deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on
impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
108
1-7. Safety information
● Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt preten-
sioners will activate.
● The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no pas-
senger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the
front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied. (P. 117)
The SRS side airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set
threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by
an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from
a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).
■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a colli-
sion
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of
your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or vehicle falling
109
Before driving
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side airbags)
1
1-7. Safety information
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (SRS front airbags)
The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved
in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of
the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (SRS side airbags)
The SRS side airbag system may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision
from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other
than the passenger compartment.
● Collision from the side to the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment
● Collision from the side at an angle
The SRS side airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in
a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.
● Collision from the front
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
110
1-7. Safety information
■ When to contact your Lexus dealer
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or
● A portion of the doors is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an
accident that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS side airbags to inflate.
● The pad section of the steering wheel,
dashboard or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
● The surface of the seats with the side air-
bag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
111
1
Before driving
deformed, or was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause the
SRS airbags to inflate.
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or
serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation,
placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a
clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering
wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can
change your driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm)
distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the
back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to
see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the
seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag
toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument
panel controls.
112
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● If the seat belt extender has been con-
● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can
cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the
airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with
the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seri-
ously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a
seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle
and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children.
(P. 122)
113
1
Before driving
nected to the front seat belt buckles but the
seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the seat belt, the
SRS front airbags will judge that the driver
and front passenger are wearing the seat
belt even though the seat belt has not been
connected. In this case, the SRS front airbags may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in
the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the
seat belt with the seat belt extender.
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean
against the dashboard.
● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the
SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on
the knees of a front passenger.
● Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or
passenger have items resting on their
knees.
● Do not lean against the door.
● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the pas-
senger seat toward the door or put their
head or hands outside the vehicle.
114
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not attach anything to or lean anything
● Do not attach anything to areas such as the
door.
● If the vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure
to remove it.
● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags
inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.
● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag
components shown on P. 107.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have
deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a door or
window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any
residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad, are
damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexus dealer.
115
1
Before driving
against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad and lower portion of the
instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles when
SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer.
The SRS airbag may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or
serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument
panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant
compartment
● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo bar
etc.)
● Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability
116
1-7. Safety information
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and
activates or deactivates the devices for front passenger.
1
Before driving
SRS warning light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
117
1-7. Safety information
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
■ Adult*1
Indicator/
warning light
Devices
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front
passenger seat
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
“AIR BAG
ON”
Off
Flashing*2
Activated
■ Child *3 or child restraint system*4
Indicator/
warning light
Devices
118
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front
passenger seat
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
“AIR BAG
OFF”*5
Off
Flashing*2
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Activated
1-7. Safety information
■ Unoccupied
Indicator/
warning light
Not illuminated
Off
1
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
■ There is a malfunction in the system
Indicator/
warning light
Devices
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front
passenger seat
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
“AIR BAG
OFF”
On
Off
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Activated
*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller
adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/
her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in
the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an
adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
119
Before driving
Devices
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front
passenger seat
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
1-7. Safety information
*4: Never install a rear facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward facing child restraint system should only be
installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable.
(P. 122)
*5: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual as for
installing the child restraint system properly. (P. 126)
CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Wear the seat belt properly.
● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the
buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the
seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle,
then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure
the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender
while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the
passenger may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury
in the event of collision.
● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on
the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on
the seatback with their legs.
● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
120
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This
● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illu-
minated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit
up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger
seat fully rearward.
● When it is unavoidable to install the forward facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat
in the proper order. (P. 126)
● Do not modify or remove the front seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise,
the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seat-
backs.
● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat
cushion surface.
● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
121
1
Before driving
may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates
that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the
seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does
not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible
when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the
effectiveness of the seat belt system.
1-7. Safety information
Child restraint systems
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of
child restraint systems.
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is safer
than installing one to the front passenger seat.
● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.
● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child
restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
(P. 126)
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according
to the age and size of the child.
Rear facing  Infant seat/convertible seat
122
1-7. Safety information
Forward facing  Convertible seat
1
Before driving
Booster seat
■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
● If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and
use the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 70)
CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must
be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on
the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior. This may cause death or serious
injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.
123
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to
the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the
child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
● Never install a rear facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even
if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the
force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear facing child restraint system is installed on the
front passenger seat.
● A forward facing child restraint system should be allowed to be installed on the
front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that
requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since
there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible even
if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger
airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may
be killed or seriously injured.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the
front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child
restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other
passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat from which the side airbags deploy even if the child is
seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags inflate, and
the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the
child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not
secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a
sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
124
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ When children are in the vehicle
■ When the child restraint system is not in use
● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use.
Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or
store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the
event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
125
1
Before driving
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted
around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could
result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut
the belt.
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the rear seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat
belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided
for each rear seat. (Buttons displaying the location of the
anchors are attached to the
seats.)
Seat belts equipped with a child
restraint locking mechanism
(ALR/ELR belts except driver’s
seat belt) (P. 70)
Anchor bracket (for top tether
strap)
Anchor brackets are provided
for both rear seats.
126
1-7. Safety information
Installation with LATCH system
Type A
Canada only
127
1
Before driving
Latch the hooks of the
lower straps onto the
LATCH anchors.
STEP 2 If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether
strap anchors.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
STEP 1
1-7. Safety information
Type B
Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors.
STEP 2 If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether
strap anchors.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
STEP 1
Canada only
128
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
■ Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Place the child seat on the rear
STEP 1
seat facing the rear of the vehicle.
1
Before driving
STEP 2
STEP 3
Run the seat belt through the child
seat and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt and
then allow it to retract slightly in
order to activate the ALR lock
mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
129
1-7. Safety information
STEP 4
While pushing the child seat down
into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child
seat is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
■ Forward facing Convertible seat
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Place the child seat on the seat
facing the front of the vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the child
seat and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder strap and
then allow it to retract slightly into
the ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
130
1-7. Safety information
STEP 4
While pushing the child seat into
the rear seat, allow the shoulder
belt to retract until the child seat is
securely in place.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top tether strap anchors.
■ Booster seat
Place the booster seat on the seat
STEP 1
facing the front of the vehicle.
STEP 5
STEP 2
Sit the child in the booster seat. Fit
the seat belt to the booster seat
according to the manufacturer's
instructions and insert the plate
into the buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's
shoulder, and that the lap belt is as
low as possible. (P. 70)
131
1
Before driving
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
1-7. Safety information
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
STEP 1
132
Secure the child restraint using a
seat belt or the lower anchors.
1-7. Safety information
STEP 2
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
Close the anchor bracket cover
after install the child restraint system.
■ When installing a child restraint system with lower anchors and a top tether strap
Depending on the child restraint system's size and shape, if the child restraint system is installed to the LATCH anchors first, it may not be possible to attach the top
tether strap to the anchor bracket.
In that case, first temporarily attach the top tether strap to the anchor bracket, install
the child restraint system using the lower anchors and then tighten the top tether
strap.
■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications
can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
133
1
Before driving
Pass the end of the top tether strap
through the gap between the seat
and the head restraint. Fold the
head restraint forward into the
stowed position. (P. 67) Open
the anchor bracket cover, latch the
hook onto the anchor bracket and
tighten the top tether strap. Return
the head restraint to the upright
position.
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ When installing a booster seat
Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR lock
mode: (P. 72)
ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort to
the child.
■ When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix
the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving
or an accident.
● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child
restraint system and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the child restraint
system to the right-hand rear seat.
● Only put a forward facing child restraint
system on the front seat when unavoidable.
When installing a forward facing child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible
even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated. Failing to do so may result in
death or serious injury if the airbags deploy
(inflate).
134
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ When installing a child restraint system
● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is posi-
● Make sure the rear seat head restraints are not in the folded position.
● Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
● Push and pull the child seat from side to side and forward to be sure it is secure.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufac-
turer.
■ Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt
will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious
injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around
the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint. Make sure
the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious
injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve
or accident.
NOTICE
■ When using an anchor bracket
To avoid cover damage, be careful not to open the cover too widely.
135
1
Before driving
tioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away
from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failing to
do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
1-7. Safety information
136
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle.................. 138
2
2-4. Using other driving
systems
Engine (ignition) switch......... 147
Cruise control.......................... 190
Automatic transmission ......... 151
Turn signal lever....................... 158
Dynamic radar cruise
control ..................................... 194
Parking brake........................... 159
Intuitive parking assist.......... 208
Horn ............................................ 160
Driving assist systems............ 214
Hill-start assist control ......... 220
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters................. 161
Indicators and warning
lights ......................................... 167
Multi-information display...... 171
PCS
(Pre-Collision System) ...... 222
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage ............... 229
Vehicle load limits.................. 232
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers
Headlight switch....................... 176
Winter driving tips................. 233
Trailer towing .......................... 237
Dinghy towing......................... 238
Fog light switch ....................... 180
Windshield wipers and
washer ..................................... 182
Headlight cleaner switch...... 189
137
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving.
■ Starting the engine (P. 147)
■ Driving
STEP 1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(P. 151)
STEP 2 Release the parking brake.
(P. 159)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■ Stopping
STEP 1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
STEP 2 If necessary, set the parking brake.
STEP 3
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the
shift lever to P or N.
(P. 151)
■ Parking the vehicle
STEP 1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
STEP 2 Set the parking brake.
(P. 159)
STEP 3 Shift the shift lever to P.
(P. 151)
STEP 4 Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch and stop the engine.
STEP 5 Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on
your person.
Starting on a steep uphill
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
138
Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Starting off on a hill
Hill-start assist control will operate. (P. 220)
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows
may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially
slippery.
● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because
■ Engine speed while driving
In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving. This is
due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.
● The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
● When the accelerator pedal is released
■ Breaking in your new Lexus
To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to
observe:
● For the first 186 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 621 miles (1000 km):
•
•
•
•
Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
Avoid sudden acceleration.
Do not drive continuously in the low gears.
Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking
brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding down.
139
When driving
there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing
the steering and brakes from operating properly.
2
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the
correct fuel. (P. 555)
CAUTION
■ When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running.
This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator
pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will
result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in
operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle
only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal
using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
● Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or
roll forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
● If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check
that the trunk is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver
drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
● Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
140
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to D while the vehicle is moving backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the engine
from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.
● During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off while
2
● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a
When driving
driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to
these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you
should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop
the vehicle in the normal way: P. 550
steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (P. 152)
● When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking brake to
prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing an accident.
● Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside
rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may
result in death or serious injury.
● Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their bodies are
not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do
not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability
tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and
possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on
your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
141
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce
your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
● Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-shifting
or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.
● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that
the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from
functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning
properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious injury.
■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)
Have your Lexus dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as possible.
The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
Front brake only: Moderate levels of the brake pad and disc wear allow enhanced
front braking power. As a result, the discs may wear more quickly than conventional
brake discs. Therefore, when replacing the brake pads, Lexus recommends that you
also have the thickness of the discs measured.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or
those of the brake discs are exceeded.
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N the vehicle may accelerate suddenly
and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.
● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and
check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
● In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep
depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking
brake as necessary.
142
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the
vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely
apply the parking brake as needed.
● Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the
exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is
nearby.
■ When the vehicle is parked
cle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following.
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic
material of eye glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of
the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components.
● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock
the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately after
turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is
snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running,
exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
143
When driving
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehi-
2
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed area, such
as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to
death or a serious health hazard.
● The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by
corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer. Failure to do so may allow
exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.
■ When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever or
depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to engine
overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust
gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.
■ When braking the vehicle
● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of
the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may
not securely hold the vehicle.
● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles
closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the pedal than
usual. Braking distance may also increase.
● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.
● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: if one of the systems
fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes longer.
Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed
immediately.
144
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving,
as this may restrain driving torque.
● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals
together to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■ When parking the vehicle
Always put the shift lever in P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the
vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an
extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damag-
ing the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
■ If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.
● The vehicle will behave abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (P. 515)
145
When driving
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
2
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■ When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the
following serious damage to the vehicle.
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to
have your Lexus dealer check the following.
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission,
differential, etc.
● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where
possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
146
2-1. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on
your person starts the engine or changes “ENGINE START STOP” switch
modes.
■ Starting the engine
STEP 1 Check that the parking brake is set.
STEP 2 Check that the shift lever is set in P.
STEP 3 Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.
2
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns green.
Press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
When driving
STEP 4
The engine will crank until it
starts or for up to 30 seconds,
whichever is less.
Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the engine is completely started.
The engine can be started from
any “ENGINE START STOP”
switch mode.
147
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode
Modes can be changed by pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time
the switch is pressed.)
OFF*
Emergency flashers can be
used.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can be
used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can
be used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
*: If the shift lever is in a position
other than P when turning off
the engine, the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch will be
turned to ACCESSORY mode,
not to OFF.
148
2-1. Driving procedures
■ If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 98)
■ When the steering lock cannot be released
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator will flash in green and a message will be
shown on the multi-information display. Press
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch again
while turning the steering wheel left and right.
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer immediately.
■ Auto power off function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes with the shift
lever in P, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically turn OFF.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
P. 38
■ When the electronic key battery is fully discharged
P. 449
■ Conditions affecting operation
P. 36
■ Note for the entry function
P. 39
149
When driving
■ When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator flashes in amber
2
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not press the accelerator while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Stopping the engine in an emergency
If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and
hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it
briefly 3 times or more in succession. (P. 550)
However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving except in
an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or
braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it
more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode for long periods without the engine running.
■ When starting the engine
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine
checked immediately.
150
2-1. Driving procedures
Automatic transmission
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
■ Shifting the shift lever
2
When driving
While the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION
ON mode, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever.
■ Shift position uses
Shift position
Function
P
Parking the vehicle or starting the engine
R
Reversing
N
Neutral
D
Normal driving*1
S
S mode driving*2 (P. 155)
*1: Shifting to the D position allows the system to select a gear suitable for the
driving conditions. Setting the shift lever to the D position is recommended
for normal driving.
*2: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible
gear ranges, controls engine braking forces, and prevents unnecessary
upshifting.
151
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Selecting a driving mode
The following patterns can be selected to suit current driving and
operating conditions.
Power mode
For powerful acceleration
and driving in mountainous
regions.
Normal mode
Snow mode
For accelerating and driving
on slippery road surfaces,
such as on snow.
Press “SNOW” to return to normal mode.
152
2-1. Driving procedures
Selecting shift ranges in the D position
To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the “-” shift paddle
switch. The shift range can then be selected by operating the “-” and “+”
shift paddle switches. Changing the shift range allows restriction of the
upper limit of the gears to be used, preventing unnecessary upshifting
and enabling the level of engine braking force to be selected.
To return to normal D position
driving, the “+” shift paddle switch
must be held down for a period of
time.
153
2
When driving
Higher shift range
Lower shift range
The selected shift range, from 1 to
6, will be displayed in the meter
cluster.
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Shift ranges and their functions
Shift range
Function
6
Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 6
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
5
Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 5
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
4
Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 4
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
3
Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 3
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
2
Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 2
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
1
Setting the gear at 1.
A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift
range.
154
2-1. Driving procedures
Changing shift ranges in S mode
To enter S mode, shift the shift lever to the S position. The shift range can
then be selected by operating the “-” and “+” shift paddle switches or the
shift lever. Changing the shift range allows restriction of the upper limit of
the gears to be used, preventing unnecessary upshifting and enabling the
level of engine braking force to be selected.
The initial shift range in S mode is automatically set to 5 or 4 according to
vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to 3 or 2 if the
AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in the D position.
(P. 157)
■ Shift ranges and their functions
P. 154
155
2
When driving
Higher shift range
Lower shift range
The selected shift range, from 1 to
6, will be displayed in the meter
cluster.
2-1. Driving procedures
■ When the “-” shift paddle switch is operated in the D position
When the “-” shift paddle switch is operated in the D position, a shift range will be
automatically selected. The highest gear of the first shift range will be one gear
lower than the gear in use during normal D position driving.
■ Automatic deactivated of shift range selection in the D position
Shift range selection in the D position will be deactivated in the following situations:
● When the vehicle comes to a stop
● When range 6 is selected and the accelerator pedal is depressed
● If the accelerator pedal is depressed for more than a certain period of time
■ To protect automatic transmission
A function is adopted that automatically selects a higher shift range when the fluid
temperature is high.
■ Gear position display when driving
The current gear is displayed on the multi-information display. (P. 174)
■ Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even
when the shift lever or shift paddle switch is operated. (The warning buzzer will
sound twice.)
■ When driving with the cruise control system or dynamic radar cruise control sys-
tem
Engine braking will not occur during shift range selection in the D position or S
mode, even when downshifting to range 5 or 4. (P. 190, 194)
■ Snow mode automatic deactivation
Snow mode is automatically deactivated if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned off after driving in snow mode.
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
P. 526
156
2-1. Driving procedures
■ If
does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to S
This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
(In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in D.)
■ AI-SHIFT
The AI-SHIFT automatically shifts the gear to the suitable position according to the
driver performance and driving conditions.
The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. However, operating the “-” shift paddle switch will restrict the function’s operation. (Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning.
157
When driving
CAUTION
2
2-1. Driving procedures
Turn signal lever
Right turn
Left turn
Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change
The right hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change
The left hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
■ Turn signals can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ If the indicators flash faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the turn signal lights has not burned out.
158
2-1. Driving procedures
Parking brake
U.S.A.
Canada
Sets the parking brake*
(Depressing the pedal again
releases the parking brake.)
*: Fully
depress the parking
brake pedal with your left
foot while depressing the
brake pedal with your right
foot.
2
When driving
■ Usage in winter time
See “Winter driving tips” for parking brake usage in winter time. (P. 233)
NOTICE
■ Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.
159
2-1. Driving procedures
Horn
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the
mark.
160
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
2
When driving
The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may
differ depending on the model/type.
The following gauges, meters and display illuminate when the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Multi-information display
P. 171
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Tacho indicator
When the set engine speed is reached, this ring-shaped indicators comes
on in yellow. The indicator comes on in red when the engine speed
reaches a dangerous range.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
161
2-2. Instrument cluster
Odometer and trip meter
Odometer: Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter: Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since
the meter was last reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be
used to record and display different distances independently.
Speed indicator
When the set speed is reached while driving, this ring-shaped indicator
comes on in yellow. The indicator comes on in red when the vehicle speed
reaches the dangerous range.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button
Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and holding
the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being displayed.
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Darker
Brighter
162
2-2. Instrument cluster
Speed and tacho indicators
■ Turning the indicator on/off
STEP 1
Bring up the satellite switch mode
on the multi-information display.
Press “”, “” or the “ON/OFF”
button.
2
Select the item whose setting is to
be changed.
Press “” or “” to display the item
whose setting is to be changed.
STEP 3
Change the settings.
Press “ON/OFF” button to change
the settings.
163
When driving
STEP 2
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Changing the indicator setting
The satellite switch can be used to change the set speed at which the
yellow speed or tacho indicator ring comes on.
The setting can be made only when the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the vehicle is stopped.
STEP 1
Push “” or “” to select the speed or tacho indicator set mode. ( ) Turn
the speed or tacho indicator to “OFF” and then “ON” by pushing the
“ON/OFF” button. ( )
After one second, the mode enters
the indicator setting mode.
The speedometer or tachometer
needle moves to the previously set
speed.
164
2-2. Instrument cluster
STEP 2
Pushing and holding the button changes values at a faster rate.
If the satellite switch is not operated for some time, the multi-information display returns to its previously displayed content.
The yellow indicator is displayed to indicate that the desired speed has
been set.
165
2
When driving
Push “” or “” within 6 seconds of the speedometer or tachometer needle moving to change the setting of the desired speed, then turn the indicator mode to “ON” by pushing the “ON/OFF” button.
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Speed indicator display conditions and vehicle speed setting range
Vehicle speed setting range: Approximately 30 to 100 mph
(approximately 50 to 160 km/h)
When the maximum speed is selected, the speed indicator comes on only in red.
■ Tacho indicator display conditions and engine speed setting range
Engine rpm setting range: Approximately 2000 to 6500 rpm (r/min)
When the maximum rpm is selected, the tacho indicator comes on only in red.
■ The brightness of the instrument panel lights
When the headlight switch is turned to on, the brightness will be reduced slightly
unless the control dial is turned fully clockwise.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indi-
cates the maximum engine speed.
● The engine may be overheating if the temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In
this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after
it has cooled completely. (P. 536)
166
2-2. Instrument cluster
Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center
panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
Instrument cluster
2
When driving
The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may
differ depending on the model/type.
Center panel
167
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Turn signal indicator
(P. 158)
Headlight high beam indicator (P. 178)
“ECT SNOW” indicator
(P. 152)
“ECT PWR” indicator
(P. 152)
Headlight indicator
(P. 176)
Cruise control indicator
(P. 190, 194)
Tail light indicator
(P. 176)
Intuitive parking assist
indicator (P. 208)
Front fog light indicator
(P. 180)
168
(if equipped)
*1, 2
Slip indicator (P. 215)
2-2. Instrument cluster
*1 VSC off indicator
(P. 216)
Shift position and shift range indicators (P. 151)
*1, 3
*1 SRS airbag on-off indicator (P. 117)
Pre-collision system
warning light (P. 222)
2
(if equipped)
When driving
*1: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is
being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a
few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not
come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.
*2: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
*3: The light flashes when the system is turned off. The light flashes quickly
to indicate that the system is operating.
169
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle’s systems. (P. 491)
*
*
*
(U.S.A.)
*
*
(U.S.A.)
*
(Canada)
*
(Canada)
*
*
(U.S.A.)
*
(Canada)
*
(if equipped)
*
(for
driver)
(for front
passenger)
*
*: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned
to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come
on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on
when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to
help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.
170
2-2. Instrument cluster
Multi-information display
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of drivingrelated data, including the current outside air temperature.
● Trip information
(P. 172)
Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruising
related information.
● Satellite switch mode display
(P. 365)
2
When driving
This switch is used to configure
various function settings.
● Intuitive parking assist display (if equipped)(P. 208)
Automatically displayed when
using intuitive parking assist.
● Dynamic radar cruise control display (if equipped)
(P. 194)
Automatically displayed when
using dynamic radar cruise control.
● Roof function status indicator
(P. 88)
Shows the operation status of
the retractable hardtop.
● Warning messages
(P. 500)
Automatically displayed when a
malfunction occurs in one of the
vehicle’s systems.
171
2-2. Instrument cluster
Trip information
Display items can be switched by
pushing the “DISP” switch.
■ Outside temperature
Displays the outside air temperature.
The temperature range that can be displayed is from
-40F (-40C) to 122F (50C).
When the temperature drops to 37F (3C), the digits of the display will flash for 10 seconds.
■ Driving range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can
be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.
• This distance is computed based on your average
fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance
that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the
tank, the display may not be updated.
When refueling, turn the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off, the display
may not be updated.
172
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Average fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption since the
function was reset.
• The function can be reset by pushing the “DISP”
switch for longer than one second when the average
fuel consumption is displayed.
• Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a
reference.
2
■ Average fuel consumption after refueling
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
■ Current fuel consumption
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.
■ Average vehicle speed
Displays the average vehicle speed since the engine
was started or the function was reset.
The function can be reset by pushing the “DISP” switch
for longer than one second when the average vehicle
speed is displayed.
173
When driving
Displays the average fuel consumption since the
vehicle was last refueled.
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Gear position display
Indicates the current gear, and the range of gears
that is available when the shift lever is in the D or S
position. The gear range is shown by the number of
dots () and the current gear is shown as a number.
The transmission automatically selects the gears
within the driver selected gear range.
In the illustration to the left, a range of 6 available gears
(1 through 6) has been selected by the driver. (The shift
lever is in the D or S position with 6 ranges enabled) It is
possible for the transmission to automatically select
between all 6 of the gears. In this case, the transmission
has selected third gear.
■ System check display
After switching the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode,
“CHECK” is displayed while system operation is checked. When the system check
is complete, “COMPLETE” is displayed before returning to the normal screen.
■ Outside temperature display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or
the display may take longer than normal to change.
● When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a
garage, tunnel, etc.)
174
2-2. Instrument cluster
CAUTION
■ The information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may
respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the driver's shifting and the new gear number
appearing on the display. In this case, wait until the display changes and take care
not to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an
accident resulting in death or serious injury.
2
When driving
175
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Type A
The daytime running
lights turn on.
The side marker, parking (vehicles with
halogen headlights),
daytime
running
lights, tail, license
plate and instrument
panel lights turn on.
The headlights and all
the lights listed above
(except daytime running lights) turn on.
The headlights, parking lights, daytime
running lights, tail,
license plate and
other lights turn on
and off automatically
(when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
is in IGNITION ON
mode).
176
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Type B
The daytime running
lights turn on.
The side marker, parking (vehicles with
halogen headlights),
daytime
running
lights, tail, license
plate and instrument
panel lights turn on.
The headlights and all
the lights listed above
(except daytime running lights) turn on.
The headlights, parking lights, daytime
running lights, tail,
license plate and
other lights turn on
and off automatically
(when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
is in IGNITION ON
mode).
2
When driving
177
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push the
lever forward to turn on the high
beams.
Pull the lever back to the center
position to turn the high beams off.
Pull the lever toward you to turn
on the high beams.
Release to turn them off. You can
flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.
■ Daytime running light system
● Vehicles with halogen headlights: to make your vehicle more visible to other
drivers, the headlights turn on automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever
the engine is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights
are not designed for use at night.
Vehicles with discharge headlights: to make your vehicle more visible to other
drivers, the parking lights turn on automatically (at a increased intensity) whenever the engine is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running
lights are not designed for use at night.
● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers
greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel
economy.
■ Headlight control sensor
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting
the level of ambient light and may cause the
automatic headlight system to malfunction.
178
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■ Automatic light off system
● When the headlights come on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds
after a door is opened and closed if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch has
been switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. (The light turns off
immediately if
on the key is pressed after both side doors are locked.)
● When only the tail lights come on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF and driver’s door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the light switch
.
off once and then back to
or
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of
passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do
not interfere with other road users.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 586)
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
179
When driving
■ Automatic headlight leveling system (vehicles with discharge headlights)
2
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Fog light switch
The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain
or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are on low beam.
Type A
Front fog lights off
Front fog lights on
180
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Type B
Front fog lights off
Front fog lights on
2
When driving
181
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Windshield wipers and washer
■ Intermittent windshield wiper with interval adjuster (if equipped)
Wiper intervals can be adjusted for intermittent operation.
Type A
Off
Intermittent
windshield wiper operation
Low speed windshield
wiper operation
High speed windshield wiper operation
Temporary operation
182
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Type B
Off
Intermittent
windshield wiper operation
Low speed windshield
wiper operation
High speed windshield wiper operation
Temporary operation
2
When driving
Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
183
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Washer/wiper dual operation
Wipers operate automatically.
(After operating several times,
the wipers operate one more
time after a short delay to prevent dripping.)
■ Rain-sensing windshield wipers (if equipped)
When
is selected, the wipers will operate automatically when
the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper
timing in according to rain volume and vehicle speed.
When
is selected, the sensor sensitivity can be adjusted as follows by turning the switch ring:
Type A
Off
Rain-sensing windshield wiper operation
Low speed windshield
wiper operation
High speed windshield wiper operation
Temporary operation
184
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Type B
Off
Rain-sensing windshield wiper operation
Low speed windshield
wiper operation
High speed windshield wiper operation
Temporary operation
2
When driving
185
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Sensor sensitivity (high)
Sensor sensitivity (low)
Washer/wiper dual operation
Wipers operate automatically.
(After operating several times,
the wipers operate one more
time after a short delay to prevent dripping.)
■ The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation
Vehicle speed affects the following even when the wipers are not in “AUTO” mode.
● Intermittent wiper interval
● Wiper operation when the washer is being used (delay until drip prevention
wiper sweep occurs)
Low speed wiper operation selected, wiper operation will be switched from low
speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary.
(However, the mode cannot be switched when the adjustment dial for the intermittent wiper interval is set to the lowest setting.)
186
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■ Raindrop sensor (vehicles with the rain-sensing windshield wipers)
● The sensor judges the amount of raindrops.
● If the wiper switch is turned to “AUTO” position while the “ENGINE START
● If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 194F (90C) or higher, or -22F
(-30C) or lower, automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate
the wipers in any mode other than “AUTO”.
■ Outside rear view mirror defogger activation linked to windshield wiper opera-
tion
The outside rear view mirror defogger automatically turns on when you operate the
windshield wipers.
■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. drip prevention function) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 586)
CAUTION
■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in “AUTO” mode (vehicles with
the rain-sensing windshield wipers)
The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the
windshield is subject to vibration in “AUTO” mode. Take care that your fingers or
anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.
187
When driving
STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the wiper will operate once to show
that auto mode is activated.
2
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
NOTICE
■ When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■ When a nozzle becomes blocked
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you
and held continually.
188
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Headlight cleaner switch
Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.
Press the switch to clean the
headlights.
2
When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the
headlight switch is turned on.
■ Windshield washer linked operation
Only for the first time when the windshield washer is operated after the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode with the headlights on, the
headlight cleaners will also operate once. (P. 182)
NOTICE
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not use this function when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause the
washer fluid pump to overheat.
: If equipped
189
When driving
■ The headlight cleaner can be operated when
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
Indicator
Cruise control switch
■ Setting the vehicle speed
STEP 1
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will
come on.
Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.
STEP 2
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
The vehicle speed at the
moment the lever is released
becomes the set speed.
: If equipped
190
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set
speed is obtained.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
2
When driving
Large adjustment: Hold the
lever in the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is
operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.
■ Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the constant speed
control.
The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are
applied.
Pushing the lever up resumes
the constant speed control.
Resuming is available when the
vehicle speed is more than
approximately 25 mph (40
km/h).
191
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in the D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.
● Range 4 or higher has been selected by using the paddle shift.
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
● The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
● Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by
first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever
down to set the new speed.
■ Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations.
● Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the
preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
■ If the cruise control indicator light flashes
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately
after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
192
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death
or serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
When driving
● On roads with sharp bends
2
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● During emergency towing
193
2-4. Using other driving systems
Dynamic radar cruise control
Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control
with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates in
order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.
Indicator
Display
Set speed
Distance switch
Cruise control switch
: If equipped
194
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode)
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
STEP 1
activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will
come on.
Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.
2
When driving
STEP 2
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
The vehicle speed at the
moment the lever is released
becomes the set speed.
195
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set
speed is displayed.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the
lever in the desired direction.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be
increased or decreased as follows:
• When the set speed is shown in “MPH”
Fine adjustment: By approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) each time the lever
is operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) for each 0.75
seconds the lever is held
• When the set speed is shown in “km/h”
Fine adjustment: By approximately 3.1 mph (5 km/h) each time the
lever is operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 3.1 mph (5 km/h) for each 0.75
seconds the lever is held
In the constant speed control mode (P. 201), the set speed will be
increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.
196
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Preceding
vehicle mark
Pressing the button changes the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance as
follows:
Long
Medium
Short
2
When driving
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance
is set automatically to long
mode when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is turned
to IGNITION ON mode.
If a vehicle is running ahead of
you, the preceding vehicle mark
will also be displayed.
■ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances
shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with
vehicle speed.
Distance options
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long
Approximately 210 ft. (65 m)
Medium
Approximately 150 ft. (45 m)
Short
Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)
197
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Canceling and resuming the speed setting
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the cruise control.
The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are
applied.
Pushing the lever up resumes
the cruise control and returns
vehicle speed to the set
speed.
Resuming is available when
the vehicle speed is more than
approximately 25 mph (40
km/h).
198
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up
to approximately 400 ft. (120 m) ahead, determines the current vehicleto-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle ahead.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long
downhill slopes.
2
When driving
Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Example of deceleration cruising
When the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically
decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone warns you when the
system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in
on the vehicle ahead.
199
2-4. Using other driving systems
Example of follow-up cruising
When following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed
The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the
speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.
Example of acceleration
When there are no longer any vehicles ahead driving slower than the
set speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then
returns to constant speed cruising.
Approach warning
When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will
flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this
would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a
vehicle. Apply the brakes to ensure an appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
■ Warnings may not occur when
In the following instances, there is a possibility that the warnings will not
occur:
● When the speed of the vehicle ahead matches or exceeds your
vehicle speed
● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely slow speed
● Immediately after the cruise control speed was set
● At the instant the accelerator is applied
200
2-4. Using other driving systems
Selecting conventional constant speed control mode
Constant speed control mode differs from vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode. When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set speed regardless of whether or not there are other
vehicles in the lane ahead.
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.
Switch to constant speed control mode.
(Push the lever forward and
hold for approximately one second.)
When in constant speed control
mode, to return to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, push
the lever forward again and hold
for approximately 1 second.
After the desired speed has been
set, it is not possible to return to
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode.
If the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is turned off and then turned
to IGNITION ON mode again, the
vehicle will automatically return to
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode.
201
When driving
Cruise control indicator will come
on.
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
Adjusting the speed setting:
P. 196
Canceling and resuming the speed
setting: P. 198
■ Dynamic radar cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in the D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.
● Range 4 or higher has been selected by using the paddle shift.
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
The vehicle can accelerate normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.
However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may
decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the vehicle
ahead.
■ Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following situations:
● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way.
● The windshield wipers are operating at high speed (when the wiper switch is set
to the “AUTO” mode or the high speed wiper operation position).
● When snow mode is set.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other
reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Automatic cancelation of constant speed control
The cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in the following situations:
● Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the
set vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
202
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Radar sensor and grille cover
Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice or plastic
objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.)
Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.
Grille cover
Radar sensor
2
Warning lights, messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or
to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. (P. 500)
203
When driving
■ Warning lights, messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR005
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radio frequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator (antenna) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt
à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.
204
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control
Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Be aware of the set speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes etc.
■ Cautions regarding the driving assist systems
2
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in determining the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated
vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive
driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It
is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.
● Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following distance
between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead is
appropriate or not. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement.
Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.
● Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control has no capability to prevent or avoid a collision
with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any danger, the driver
must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in
order to ensure the safety of all involved.
205
When driving
● Assisting the driver to measure following distance
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and
down gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● At entrances to expressways
● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors
from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)
● When an approach warning buzzer is heard often
● During emergency towing
■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in
front of you.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the
approach warning (P. 200) will not be activated, and a fatal or serious accident
may result.
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving
● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
206
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function
correctly
Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may
not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and a fatal or serious accident may
result.
● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function-
ing of the sensor
2
● When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the trunk etc.)
When driving
● When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow
● When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable
● When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly
■ Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the cruise control system can function effectively.
Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident.
● Keep the sensor and grille cover clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.
● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the
sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area
inspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding
area.
● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.
● Do not replace them with non-genuine parts.
207
2-4. Using other driving systems
Intuitive parking assist
The distance to obstacles measured by the sensors is communicated via
the multi-information display and a buzzer when parallel parking or
maneuvering into a garage. Always check the surrounding area when
using this system.
With navigation system
For vehicles equipped with a navigation system, refer to the separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual” for further details.
Without navigation system
■ Types of sensors
Front corner sensors
Rear corner sensors
Back sensors
■ Multi-information display (P. 171)
Front corner sensor operation
Rear corner sensor operation
Back sensor operation
: If equipped
208
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Intuitive parking assist switch (P. 365)
When on, an indicator is displayed to inform the driver that
the function is operational.
2
■ Corner sensor operation display and distance to an obstacle
The system operates when the vehicle approaches within approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) of an obstacle.
Approximately 1.2 ft. (37.5 cm)
to 1.6 ft. (50 cm) from the obstacle
Approximately 0.8 ft. (25 cm)
to 1.2 ft. (37.5 cm) from the
obstacle
Flashing: Within 0.8 ft. (25 cm)
of the obstacle
209
When driving
The display and buzzer system
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Back sensor operation display and distance to an obstacle
The system operates when the vehicle approaches within approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) of an obstacle.
Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
to 4.9 ft. (150 cm) from the
obstacle
Approximately 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to
2.0 ft. (60 cm) from the obstacle
Approximately 1.1 ft. (35 cm) to
1.5 ft. (45 cm) from the obstacle
Flashing: Within 1.1 ft. (35 cm) of
the obstacle
■ Buzzer operation and distance to the obstacle
A buzzer sounds when the corner sensors and back sensor are operating.
● The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle. When the
vehicle comes within the following distance of the obstacle, the buzzer
sounds continuously.
• Corner sensors: Approximately 0.8 ft. (25 cm)
• Back sensors: Approximately 1.1 ft. (35 cm)
● When two or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the buzzer system responds to the nearest obstacle.
210
2-4. Using other driving systems
Detection range of the sensors
Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm)
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm)
The diagram shows the detection
range of the sensors. Note that the
sensors cannot detect obstacles
that are extremely close to the
vehicle.
2
The range of the sensors may
change depending on the shape of
the object etc.
When driving
211
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Sensor detection information
● Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the
ability of the sensor to correctly detect obstacles. Particular instances where this
may occur are listed below.
•
•
•
•
•
•
There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor.
The sensor is frozen.
The sensor is covered in any way.
The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines,
air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.
• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.
• The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna.
• Towing eyelets are installed.
• The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather
In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their
shapes, signs and other objects may be judged by the sensor to be closer than they
are.
● The shape of the obstacle may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particu-
lar attention to the following obstacles.
•
•
•
•
•
Wires, fences, ropes etc.
Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb radio waves
Sharply-angled objects
Low obstacles
Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your
vehicle
■ When the display flashes and a message is displayed
P. 500
212
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
For vehicles sold in Canada
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
2
Cet appareil ISM est conforme à la norme NMB-001 du Canada.
Settings (e.g. buzzer volume) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 586)
CAUTION
■ Caution when using the intuitive parking sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.
● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
● Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range.
NOTICE
■ Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
213
When driving
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems
operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware,
however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied
upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface.
■ Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.
■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on
slippery road surfaces.
■ TRAC (Traction Control)
Maintains drive power and prevents the rear wheels from spinning when
starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.
■ Hill-start assist control
P. 220
■ EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn
the steering wheel.
214
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management)
Provides integrated control of the ABS, brake assist, TRAC, VSC, and
EPS systems.
Helps to maintain vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling the brakes, engine output and steering assist.
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)
P. 222
2
The slip indicator light flashes to
indicate that the VSC/TRAC systems have been engaged.
215
When driving
When the VSC/TRAC systems are operating
2-4. Using other driving systems
To disable TRAC/VSC
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC and VSC may
reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn the
system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
■ Turning off TRAC
Quickly push and release the
switch to turn off TRAC.
A message will be shown on the
multi-information display.
Push the switch again to turn the
system back on.
■ Turning off TRAC and VSC
To turn the TRAC and VSC systems off, press and hold the switch
for 3 seconds or more while the
vehicle is stopped.
A message will be shown on the
multi-information display and VSC
off indicator light will come on.
Push the switch again to turn the
system back on.
216
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ When the message is displayed on the multi-information display showing that
TRAC has been disabled even if the VSC off switch has not been pressed
TRAC and hill-start assist control cannot be operated. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Automatic reactivation of the TRAC/VSC systems
If the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off, re-starting the engine will automatically
reactivate them.
■ Automatic TRAC reactivation
If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when vehicle
speed increases.
If the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on even when
vehicle speed increases.
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC and TRAC systems
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment if the brake pedal is
depressed repeatedly when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins
to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of
these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operat-
ing. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
•
•
•
•
Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
217
When driving
■ Automatic TRAC and VSC reactivation
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be
heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system
The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The
steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive
steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The EPS system should
return to normal within 10 minutes.
■ If the slip indicator comes on
It may indicate a malfunction in the VSC or TRAC function.
Contact your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ The ABS does not operate effectively when
● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as excessively
worn tires on a snow covered road).
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick road.
■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal condi-
tions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following situations.
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven roads
218
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road
surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
■ When the VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause
an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. Exercise particular care when the
indicator light flashes.
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As
these are systems to help enhance vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn off
TRAC and VSC unless necessary.
■ Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load
capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire
pressure level.
The ABS, VSC and TRAC systems will not function correctly if different tires are fitted on the vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
■ Handling of tires and suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.
219
When driving
■ When TRAC and VSC are off
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
Hill-start assist control
Hill-start assist control helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards
when starting on an incline or slippery slope.
To engage hill-start assist control, further depress the brake
pedal when the vehicle is
stopped completely.
A buzzer will sound once to
indicate the system is activated.
The slip indicator will also start
flashing.
■ Hill-start assist control can be operated when
● The shift lever is in a position other than P.
● The parking brake is not applied.
● The accelerator pedal is not depressed.
■ Hill-start assist control
● While hill-start assist control is operating, the brakes remain automatically
applied after the driver releases the brake pedal. The stop lights and the high
mounted stoplight turn on.
● Hill-start assist control operates for about 2 seconds after the brake pedal is
released.
● If the slip indicator does not flash and the buzzer does not sound when the brake
pedal is further depressed, slightly reduce the pressure on the brake pedal (do
not allow the vehicle to roll backward) and then firmly depress it again. If the system still does not operate, check if the operating conditions explained above
have been met.
220
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Hill-start assist control buzzer
● When hill-start assist control is activated, the buzzer will sound once.
● In the following situations, hill-start assist control will be canceled and the
buzzer will sound twice.
• No attempt is made to drive the vehicle within approximately 2 seconds of
releasing the brake pedal.
• The shift lever is moved to P.
• The parking brake is applied.
• The brake pedal is depressed again.
• The brake pedal has been depressed for more than approximately 3 minutes.
When driving
■ If the slip indicator comes on
2
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ Hill-start assist control
● Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may not oper-
ate effectively on extremely steep inclines or roads covered in ice.
● Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the vehi-
cle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start
assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline for an extended period of time, as
doing so may lead to an accident.
221
2-4. Using other driving systems
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
When the radar sensor detects possibility of a frontal collision, the pre-collision systems such as the brakes and seat belts are automatically engaged
in an attempt to lessen damage.
■ Pre-collision seat belts
If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the precollision system will retract the seat belt before the collision occurs.
The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or loses
control of the vehicle. (P. 72)
However, the system will not operate in the event of skidding when the
VSC systems are disabled.
■ Pre-collision brake assist
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system applies
greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is
depressed.
■ Pre-collision braking
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system warns the
driver using a warning light, warning display and buzzer. If the system
determines that a collision is unavoidable, the brakes are automatically
applied to reduce the collision speed. The pre-collision braking function
can be turned on and off using the satellite switch.
: If equipped
222
2-4. Using other driving systems
Disabling the pre-collision braking
The pre-collision braking function
can be turned on and off using the
satellite switch. (P. 365)
Press “”or “” to display the PCS
brake setting ( ). Then, press the
“ON/OFF” button in the middle of
the switch to select either “ON” or
“OFF” ( ).
2
It may take approximately 3 seconds for the display to change after
the satellite switch is operated.
When driving
The pre-collision system warning
light flashes when “OFF” is
selected.
Radar sensor
Detects vehicles or other obstacles on or near the road ahead and
determines whether a collision is
imminent based on the position,
speed, and heading of the obstacles.
Grille cover
Radar sensor
■ Obstacles not detected
The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as pylons. There may also be occasions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcycles,
trees, or snowdrifts.
223
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ The pre-collision system is operational when
● Pre-collision seat belt (type A)
• Vehicle speed is above 4 mph (5 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle is
greater than 19 to 25 mph (30 to 40 km/h).
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
● Pre-collision seat belts (type B)
• Vehicle speed exceeds 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The system detects sudden braking or skidding.
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
● Pre-collision brake Assist
• Vehicle speed is above 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle is
greater than 19 to 25 mph (30 to 40 km/h).
• The brake pedal is depressed.
● Pre-collision braking:
• The pre-collision braking function is activated.
• Vehicle speed is above 10 mph (1 5 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle is
greater than 10 mph (15 km/h).
■ Situations in which the pre-collision system does not function properly
The system may not function effectively in situations such as the following:
● On roads with sharp bends or uneven surfaces
● If a vehicle suddenly moves in front of your vehicle, such as at an intersection
● If a vehicle suddenly cuts in front of your vehicle, such as when overtaking
● In inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or sand storms
● When your vehicle is skidding with the VSC system off
● When an extreme change in vehicle height occurs
● When the axis of the radar is out of adjustment
224
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no possibility of collision
● When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve
● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve
● When driving over a narrow iron bridge
● When there is a metal object on the road surface
● When driving on an uneven road surface
● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn
2
● When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front
● When a grade separation/interchange, sign, billboard, or other structure
● When an overhead billboard or other metallic structure appears to be in the
vehicle’s direct line of travel due to driving on a hill.
● When an extreme change in vehicle height occurs
● When the axis of the radar is out of adjustment
● When passing through certain toll gates
● When driving on a bridge.
When the system is activated in the situations described above there is also a possibility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force
greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten.
■ Automatic cancelation of the pre-collision system
When a malfunction occurs due to sensor contamination, etc. that results in the
sensors being unable to detect obstacles, the pre-collision system will be automatically disabled. In this case, the system will not activate even if there is a collision possibility.
■ When there is a malfunction in the system
Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 491, 500)
225
When driving
appears to be directly in the vehicle’s line of travel.
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR005
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radio frequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator (antenna) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt
à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.
226
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Limitations of the pre-collision system
Do not rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to observe
your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Cautions regarding the assist contents of the system
● Assisting the driver in watching the road
The pre-collision system is only able to detect obstacles directly in front of the
vehicle, and only within a limited range. It is not a mechanism that allows careless
or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for the driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.
● Assisting the driver in making correct judgment
When attempting to estimate the possibility of a collision, the only data available
to the pre-collision system is that from obstacles it has detected directly in front of
the vehicle. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant
and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of collision in any given situation.
● Assisting the driver in taking action
The pre-collision system’s braking assist feature is designed to help reduce the
severity of a collision, and so only acts when the system has judged that a collision
is unavoidable. This system by itself is not capable of automatically avoiding a collision or bringing the vehicle to a stop safely. For this reason, when encountering a
dangerous situation the driver must take direct and immediate action in order to
ensure the safety of all involved.
227
2
When driving
By means of alarms and brake control, the pre-collision system is intended to assist
the driver in avoiding collisions through the process of LOOK-JUDGE-ACT. There
are limits to the degree of assistance the system can provide, so please keep in mind
the following important points.
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively.
● Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.
● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may become inaccurate
or malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area are subject to a strong impact,
always have the area inspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille guard or surrounding
area.
● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille.
228
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo
capacity and load.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible. Be sure
all items are secured in place.
● Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.
● For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
2
When driving
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400  750 (5150) = 650
lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
229
2-5. Driving information
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is
not designed for trailer towing.
Calculation formula for your vehicle
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity (vehicle
capacity weight) (P. 552)
When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your
vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb.
(kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C
lb. (kg) as follows:
B*2 lb. (kg) - A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb. (kg)
*1: A =Weight of people
*2: B =Total load capacity
*3: C =Available cargo and luggage load
In this condition, if 2 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg)
get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:
C lb. (kg) - D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb. (kg)
*4: D =Additional weight of people
*5: E =Available cargo and luggage load
230
2-5. Driving information
As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases,
the cargo and luggage load equaling the combined weight of the occupants who got on later, by an amount. In other words, if an increase in the
number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must
reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
CAUTION
2
■ Things that must not be carried in the trunk
When driving
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk.
● Receptacles containing gasoline
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the item may
get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the pedals from being
depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit the driver or passengers,
causing an accident.
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• On the package tray
• On the instrument panel
• On the dashboard
● Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
● Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total
load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.
231
2-5. Driving information
Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing
capacity and cargo capacity.
■ Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): (P. 552)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and
luggage.
■ Seating capacity: 4 occupants (Front 2, Rear 2)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
■ Towing capacity
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
■ Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and
the number of occupants.
■ Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information label.
(P. 441)
CAUTION
■ Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking
ability, resulting in an accident.
232
2-5. Driving information
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the
vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the
prevailing weather conditions.
■ Pre-winter preparations
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of
tire chains for the rear tires.
Ensure that all tires are the specified size and the same brand, and that
chains match the size of the tires.
■ Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions.
● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe
away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in
front of the windshield.
● Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.
● Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that
may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes.
233
2
When driving
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
● Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of
battery electrolyte.
2-5. Driving information
■ When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable
to road conditions.
■ When parking the vehicle (in the winter time or in the cold latitudes)
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P and block the wheel
under the vehicle without setting the parking brake. The parking
brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If necessary,
block the wheels to prevent inadvertent sliding or creeping.
Selecting tire chains
They cannot be mounted on 18-inch tires. Use the correct tire chain size
when mounting the tire chains. Chain size is regulated for each tire sizes.
Side chain
(0.12 in. [3 mm] in diameter)
Cross chain
(0.16 in. [4 mm] in diameter)
Regulations on the use of tire chains
● Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location
and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing
chains.
● Install the chains on the rear tires.
● Retighten the chains after driving 1/4  1/2 mile (0.5  1.0 km).
234
2-5. Driving information
■ Tire chain installation (17-inch tires only)
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the rear tires only. Do not install tire chains on front tires.
● Install the tire chains on rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after
driving 1/4  1/2 mile (0.5  1.0 km).
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying
instructions.
■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious
injury.
● Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.
● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires
being used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
■ Driving with tire chains (17-inch tires only)
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may
cause death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used,
or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle
handling.
● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is
maintained.
235
When driving
CAUTION
2
2-5. Driving information
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of
the tire air pressure sensor.
■ Fitting tire chains
The tire air pressure sensor may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.
236
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also
does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch
carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your Lexus is not designed
for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.
2
When driving
237
2-5. Driving information
Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the
ground) behind a motor home.
NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.
238
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
239
Interior features
3
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning
system..................................... 242
Rear window and
outside rear view
mirror defoggers.................. 251
Windshield wiper de-icer.... 252
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system type ................. 253
Using the radio ....................... 256
Using the CD player............. 264
Playing back MP3 and
WMA discs ............................. 271
Operating an iPod.................. 279
Operating a USB
memory.................................. 287
Optimal use of the audio
system..................................... 296
Using the AUX port.............. 298
Using the steering wheel
audio switches...................... 300
240
Interior features
3-3. Using the Bluetooth®
audio system
Bluetooth®
audio system ... 303
Using the Bluetooth®
3
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list .................... 353
• Interior light.......................... 354
• Personal lights ..................... 354
audio system ......................... 306
Operating a Bluetooth®
enabled portable player...... 311
Setting up a Bluetooth®
enabled portable player..... 315
Bluetooth® audio system
setup......................................... 321
3-4. Using the hands-free
phone system
(for mobile phones)
3-6. Using the storage
features
List of storage features......... 355
• Glove box.............................. 356
• Console box ......................... 357
• Cup holders.......................... 358
• Auxiliary box ......................... 361
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors ................................. 362
Hands-free system for
mobile phones ..................... 322
Vanity mirror ........................... 363
Using the hands-free system
(for mobile phones)............. 326
Satellite switches ................... 365
Making a phone call .............. 334
Cigarette lighter.................... 369
Setting a mobile phone........ 338
Power outlet ............................ 370
Security and system
setup....................................... 343
Seat heaters and
ventilators .............................. 371
Using the phone book........... 347
Floor mat .................................. 373
Clock......................................... 364
Ashtrays.................................... 368
Trunk features.......................... 374
Garage door opener ............. 377
Compass .................................. 383
Safety Connect ...................... 387
241
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
With navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the
“Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Without navigation system
Fan speed
Fan speed display
Off
Driver’s side temperature
setting display
Automatic mode
Driver's side
temperature control
Airflow display
Changes the air outlets used
Passenger’s side
temperature setting display
Micro dust and
pollen filter
Passenger’s side
temperature control
Windshield defogger
Dual operation switch
Air conditioning on/off switch
Outside air or recirculated mode
Using the automatic mode
STEP 1
Press
.
The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets and fan
speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
STEP 2
Press
to switch to automatic mode. (IS350C only)
Automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
242
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
STEP 3
 to increase the temperature and “” to
Press “” on
decrease the temperature.
The temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be set separately.
Adjusting the settings
■ Adjusting the temperature setting
Press “” on
to increase the temperature and “” to decrease
3
the temperature.
Dual mode (the indicator on
is on): The temperature for the
front left-hand seat and front right-hand seat can be adjusted separately. Operating the passenger's side temperature control will enter
dual mode.
When the indicator on
is on, the temperature of the rear seats is
linked with that of the front left-hand seat.
Simultaneous mode (the indicator on
is off): Only
(driver’s side) can be used to adjust the temperature for all seats.
■ Adjusting the fan speed
Press “” (increase) or “” (decrease) on
Press
.
to turn the fan off.
243
Interior features
The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous
modes each time
is pressed.
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Changing the air outlets
Press
.
The air outlets switch each time the
on the display indicates the following.
is pressed. The air flow shown
Upper body
*: Automatic air flow mode only
*
*
*
*
Upper body and feet
Feet
244
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Feet and windshield
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
IS250C
Press
.
IS350C
Press
.
The mode switches among
(recycles air inside the vehicle),
“AUTO” and
(introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each
time
is pressed.
When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning
system operates automatically.
Defogging the windshield
Press
.
The air conditioning system operates automatically.
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to
(outside
air) mode when the ambient temperature is low.
245
3
Interior features
The mode switches between
(recycles air inside the vehicle) and
(introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each time
is pressed.
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Micro dust and pollen filter
Press
.
Outside air mode switches to
(recirculated air) mode. Pollen is removed from the air and the
air flows to the upper part of the
body.
Usually the system will turn off
automatically after 1 or 3 minutes.
To stop the operation, press
again.
Adjusting the sensitivity of the air intake control in automatic mode (IS350C only)
STEP 1
Press
onds.
STEP 2
Press “” (increase) or “”
(decrease) on
for 2 or more sec-
.
From -3 (low) to 3 (high) can be
set.
246
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Front outlets (center)
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent
Front outlets (right and left side)
3
247
Interior features
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down
Turn the knob fully to the outside
of the vehicle to close the vent
■ Using the automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and
ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur.
● Immediately after
is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or
cool air is ready to flow.
● Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on.
■ Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an
extended period.
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched to in
accordance with the temperature setting and the inside temperature. When the
retractable hardtop is opened, recirculated air mode is automatically selected.
■ Window defogger feature
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to
ations where the windows need to be defogged.
(outside air) mode in situ-
■ When outside air temperature approaches 32F (0C)
The air conditioning system may not operate even when
248
is pressed.
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ When the indicator light on
flashes
Press
and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on once
more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator light
continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected by your
Lexus dealer.
■ Automatic mode for air intake control (IS350C only)
In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes. When the
retractable hardtop is opened, recirculated air mode is automatically selected.
■ Micro dust and pollen filter
● In order to prevent the window from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the
following may occur.
3
.
■ Air conditioning odors
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into
and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be
emitted from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode
prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.
CAUTION
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use
during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can
cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
249
Interior features
• Outside air mode does not switch to
.
• The air conditioning system operates automatically.
• The operation cancels after 1 minute.
● In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine
is off.
250
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
With navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the
“Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Without navigation system
On/off
The defoggers will automatically
turn off after 15 to 60 minutes.
The operation time changes
according to the ambient temperature and vehicle speed.
3
Interior features
■ The defogger can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ When the retractable hardtop is open
The rear window defogger is not operable. The indicator will come on if the outside
rear view mirror defoggers are used.
CAUTION
■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on
Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirror, as it can become very hot
and burn you.
251
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Windshield wiper de-icer
This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and
wiper blades.
On/off
The windshield wiper de-icer
will automatically turn off after
approximately 15 minutes.
■ The windshield wiper de-icer can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
CAUTION
■ When the windshield wiper de-icer is on
The surface of the glass at the lower part and sides of the windshield become very
hot. To prevent burning yourself, do not touch these areas.
: If equipped
252
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system type
With navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to
the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Without navigation system (type A)
CD player with changer and AM/FM radio
3
Interior features
Without navigation system (type B)
CD player with changer and AM/FM radio
253
3-2. Using the audio system
Title
254
Page
Using the radio
P. 256
Using the CD player
P. 264
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs
P. 271
Operating an iPod
P. 279
Operating a USB memory
P. 287
Optimal use of the audio system
P. 296
Using the AUX port
P. 298
Using the steering wheel audio switches
P. 300
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is
being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.
CAUTION
■ For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada
● Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s
authority to operate this device.
3
● Laser products
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine off.
■ To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.
255
Interior features
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the
surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain
inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any
of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the radio
Type A
Seeking any traffic
program station
Station
selector
Displays radio text messages
Silencing a sound
Power Volume
Seeking the
frequency
AMFM/SAT
mode buttons
Adjusting the frequency
(AM, FM mode) or
channel (SAT mode)
Changing the program types
Scans for receivable stations
Type B
Seeking any traffic
program station
Station
selector
Adjusting the frequency
Power Volume
Seeking the
frequency
AM/FM
mode buttons
256
Silencing a sound
Station selector
3-2. Using the audio system
Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
STEP 1
“” on
STEP 2
or pressing “” or
Search for desired stations by turning
.
Press and hold the button (from
be set to until you hear a beep.
to
) the station is to
Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio) (type A)
■ Scanning the preset radio stations
STEP 1
Press and hold
3
until you hear a beep.
When the desired station is reached, press
■ Scanning all radio stations within range
STEP 1 Press
.
STEP 2
Interior features
Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
once again.
All stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.
STEP 2
When the desired station is reached, press
once again.
257
3-2. Using the audio system
RDS (Radio Data System) (type A)
This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information
and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which
broadcast this information.
■ Receiving RDS broadcasts
STEP 1
Press “” or “” on
during FM reception.
The type of program changes each time
is pressed.
● “ROCK”
● “EASYLIS” (Easy listening)
● “CLS/JAZZ” (Classical music and Jazz)
● “R & B” (Rhythm and Blues)
● “INFORM” (Information)
● “RELIGION”
● “MISC” (Miscellaneous)
● “ALERT” (Emergency messages)
If the system receives no RDS stations, “NO PTY” appears on the display.
STEP 2
Press
, or “” or “” on
.
The radio seeks or scans the stations by the relevant program type.
258
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Displaying radio station names
Press
.
■ Displaying radio text messages
Press
twice.
If “MSG” shows in the display, a text message will be displayed.
If the text continues past the end of the display,
hold
until you hear a beep.
is displayed. Press and
XM® Satellite Radio (type A)
■ Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
STEP 1
Turn
3
is pressed.
to select the desired channel in the all categories or
press “” or “” on
to select the desired channel in the cur-
rent category.
■ Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets
Select the desired channel. Press the button the channel is to be set to
(from
to
) until you hear a beep.
■ Changing the channel category
Press “” or “” on
.
259
Interior features
STEP 2
Press
.
The display changes as follows each time
“SAT1”  “SAT2”  “SAT3”
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels
● Scanning channels in the current category
Press
.
STEP 2 When the desired channel is reached, press
● Scanning preset channels
STEP 1
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
STEP 2 When the desired channel is reached, press
■ Displaying text information
Press
.
again.
STEP 1
The display will show up to 10 characters.
The display changes as follows each time
● CH NAME
● TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM TITLE)
● NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEATURE)
● CH NUMBER
260
is pressed.
again.
3-2. Using the audio system
■ When the battery is disconnected
Stations presets are erased.
■ Radio antenna type
● Detachable antenna
To remove a detachable antenna, carefully turn it counterclockwise.
● Wire antenna
The radio antenna is mounted inside the windshield.
■ Reception sensitivity
● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually
changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding
objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
● The radio antenna is mounted inside the windshield. To maintain clear radio
■ XM® Satellite Radio
An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous
states and 10 Canadian provinces.
● XM® subscriptions
For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe:
U.S.A. 
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-877-515-3987.
Canada 
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-515-3987.
● Radio ID
You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a prob-
lem. Select “CH000” using
, and the receiver's 8-character ID number
will appear.
● Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.
261
Interior features
reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the
antenna wire mounted inside the windshield.
3
3-2. Using the audio system
■ If the satellite radio does not operate normally
If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer
to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.
“ANTENNA”
The XM® antenna is not connected. Check whether
the XM® antenna cable is attached securely.
There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer.
You have not subscribed to the XM® Satellite Radio.
The radio is being updated with the latest encryption
code. Contact the XM® Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can
choose the “CH000” and all free-to-air channels.
“UNAUTH”
“NO SIGNAL”
“LOADING”
262
The premium channel you selected is not authorized.
Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the
previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change
automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact the XM® Satellite
Radio.
The XM® signal is too weak at the current location.
Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.
The unit is acquiring audio or program information.
Wait until the unit has received the information.
“OFF AIR”
The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.
“-----”
There is no song/program title or artist name/feature
associated with the channel at that time. No action
needed.
3-2. Using the audio system
“CH UNAVL”
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait
for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel.
Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987.
■ Certifications for the radio tuner
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation.
● Reorienting or relocate the receiving antenna.
● Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.
● Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
● Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
263
Interior features
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of the following:
3
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the CD player
Type A
Repeat play
Playback/Pause
Random playback
Displays text
message
Silencing a sound
Power Volume
CD eject Playback
Track selection
Search playback
CD selection
CD load
Type B
Repeat play
Random playback
Playback/Pause
Displays text
message
Silencing a sound
Power Volume
CD eject Playback
Track selection
264
CD selection
CD load
3-2. Using the audio system
Loading CDs
■ Loading a CD
STEP 1 Push
.
“WAIT” is shown on the display.
STEP 2
Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to
green.
The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.
■ Loading multiple CDs
STEP 1 Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
STEP 2
Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to
green.
3
The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.
Interior features
“WAIT” is shown on the display.
The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is inserted.
STEP 3
Insert the next CD when the indicator on the slot turns from
amber to green again.
Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs.
To stop the operation, press
or
.
265
3-2. Using the audio system
Ejecting CDs
■ Ejecting a CD
To select the CD to be ejected,
STEP 1
press “” or “” on
or
.
The number of the CD selected is
shown on the display.
Press
and remove the CD.
■ Ejecting all the CDs
Press and hold
until you hear a beep, and then remove the CDs.
STEP 2
Selecting, fast-forwarding, reversing and scanning tracks
■ Selecting a track
Press “” to move up and “” to move down using
until the
desired track number is displayed.
To fast forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on
a beep.
until you hear
■ Scanning a CD (type A)
STEP 1 Press
.
The first ten seconds of each track will be played.
STEP 2
266
Press
again when the desired track is reached.
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a CD
■ To select a CD to play
To select the desired CD, press “” or “” on
or
.
■ To scan loaded CDs (type A)
STEP 1 Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first track on each CD will be played.
STEP 2
Press
again when the desired CD is reached.
Random playback
3
■ All CDs
Press and hold
Interior features
■ Current CD
Press
(RAND).
(RAND) until you hear a beep.
Repeat play
■ To repeat a track
Press
(RPT).
■ To repeat all of the tracks on a CD
Press and hold
(RPT) until you hear a beep.
Playing and pausing tracks
To play or pause a track, press
(
).
Switching the display
Press
.
Each time
is pressed, the display changes in the order of Track no./
Elapsed time  CD title  Track title.
267
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Display
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding
until you hear a
beep will display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
If
is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been pressed for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all.
■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Press
(RAND),
(RPT),
(type A) again.
■ When “LOAD”, “ERROR” or “WAIT” is shown on the display
“LOAD”: This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the CD.
“ERROR”: This indicates a trouble either in the CD or inside the player. The CD
may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT”:
Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait
for a while and then press
or
. Contact your Lexus dealer if
the CD still cannot be played back.
■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or
due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protection features may not play correctly.
268
3-2. Using the audio system
■ CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected.
■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-
ods
CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.
■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used
3
● CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.
(12 cm).
● Low-quality and deformed CDs.
269
Interior features
Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Disc.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
● CDs with a transparent or translucent
recording area.
● CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-R
labels attached to them, or that have had
the label peeled off.
■ CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the CDs or
the player itself.
● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
● Do not apply oil to the CD player.
● Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
● Do not insert more than one CD at a time.
270
3-2. Using the audio system
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs
Type A
Playback/Pause
Repeat play
Random playback
Folder selection
Displays text message
Silencing a sound
3
File selection
Power Volume
Interior features
File
Playback
selection
Search
playback
CD eject
CD selection
CD load
Type B
Playback/Pause
Repeat play
Random playback
Folder selection
Displays text message
Silencing a
sound
File selection
Power Volume
File
selection
CD eject
Playback
CD selection
CD load
271
3-2. Using the audio system
Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs
P. 265, 266
Selecting MP3 and WMA discs
P. 267
Selecting a folder
■ Selecting folders one at a time
Press
() or
() to select the desired folder.
■ Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder
(type A)
Press and hold
reached, press
until you hear a beep. When the desired folder is
once again.
■ Returning to the first folder
Press and hold
() until you hear a beep.
Fast-forwarding and reversing files
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on
hear a beep.
272
until you
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting and scanning files
■ Selecting one file at a time
Turn
or press “” or “” on
to select the desired file.
■ Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder (type A)
Press
.
When the desired file is reached, press
once again.
Repeat play
3
Interior features
■ Repeating a file
Press
(RPT).
■ Repeating all of the files in a folder
Press and hold
(RPT) until you hear a beep.
Random playback
■ To play files from a particular folder in random order
Press
(RAND).
■ To play all of the files on a disc in random order
Press and hold
(RAND) until you hear a beep.
Playing and pausing files
To play or pause a file, press
(
).
Switching the display
Press
.
Each time
is pressed, the display changes in the order of Folder no./
File no./Elapsed time  Folder name  File name  Album title (MP3
only)  Track title  Artist name.
273
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Display
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding
until you hear a
beep will display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
If
is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been pressed for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all.
■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Press
(RAND),
(RPT),
(type A) again.
■ When “LOAD”, “ERROR”, “WAIT” or “NO MUSIC” is shown on the display.
“LOAD”: This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the CD.
“ERROR”: This indicates a trouble either in the CD or inside the player. The CD
may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT”:
Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait
for a while and then press
or
. Contact your Lexus dealer if
the CD still cannot be played back.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that the MP3/WMA file is not included in the CD.
274
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or
due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
■ CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-
ods
3
CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
■ MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats
recorded by them that can be used.
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
275
Interior features
■ Lens cleaners
3-2. Using the audio system
● WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
● Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status of the
CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc
is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
● Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those
listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and
folder names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● Multi-sessions
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs
that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.
276
3-2. Using the audio system
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title,
artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The
number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
● MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first
checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To
make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any
files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot
be played.
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This
may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
● Playback
• To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of
128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and
WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and
the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result.
In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take
more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
277
Interior features
● Extensions
3
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used
P. 269
■ CD player precautions
P. 270
278
3-2. Using the audio system
Operating an iPod
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.
■ Connecting an iPod
STEP 1
Open the cover and connect
the portable audio device.
Turn on the power of the iPod if it
is not turned on.
Type A
STEP 2
.
Press
.
3
Interior features
Press
Type B
STEP 2
279
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Control panel
Type A
Repeat play
Shuffle playback
Playback/Pause
Go back
Displays text message
Silencing a sound
iPod menu/
Song selection
Song selection
Power Volume
Song selection
280
Playback
3-2. Using the audio system
Type B
Repeat play
Shuffle playback
Playback/Pause
Go back
Displays text message
Silencing a sound
iPod menu/
Song selection
Song selection
3
Power Volume
Interior features
Song selection
Playback
Selecting a play mode
STEP 1
Press
to select iPod menu mode.
STEP 2
Pressing
or
changes the play mode in the following
order:
“PLAYLISTS”“ARTISTS”“ALBUMS”“SONGS”
“PODCASTS”“GENRES”“COMPOSERS”
“AUDIOBOOKS”
STEP 3
Press
to select the desired play mode.
281
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Play mode list
Play mode
First
selection
Second
selection
Third
selection
Fourth
selection
-
-
“PLAYLISTS”
Playlists select Songs select
“ARTISTS”
Artists select
“ALBUMS”
Albums select Songs select
-
-
“SONGS”
Songs select
-
-
-
-
Albums select Songs select
-
“PODCASTS” Albums select Songs select
“GENRES”
Genre select
Artists select
“COMPOSERS”
Composers
select
Albums select Songs select
“AUDIOBOOKS” Songs select
-
-
Albums select Songs select
-
-
■ Selecting a list
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Press
to select the desired item.
Pressing
changes to the second selection list.
Repeat the same procedure to select the desired item.
STEP 3
or
to display the first selection list.
To return to the previous selection list, select “GO BACK” or press
(
).
282
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting songs
Turn
or press “” or “” on
to select the desired song.
Playing and pausing songs
To play or pause a song, press
(
).
Fast-forwarding and rewinding songs
To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “” or “” on
until you
Interior features
hear a beep.
Shuffle playback
■ Playing songs from one playlist or album in random order
Press
(RAND).
■ Playing songs from all the playlists or albums in random order
Press and hold
(RAND) until you hear a beep.
Repeat play
Press
(RPT).
Switching the display
Press
3
.
Each time
is pressed, the display changes in the order of Elapsed time
 Album title  Track title  Artist name.
283
3-2. Using the audio system
Adjusting sound quality and volume balance
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Pressing
to enter iPod menu mode.
changes sound modes. (P. 297)
■ About iPod
● Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with
safety and regulatory standards.
● iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
■ iPod functions
● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the
iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may
not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to
a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once
again may resolve the problem.
● While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own con-
trols. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle's audio system instead.
■ iPod problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect your iPod
from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it.
For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner's Manual.
284
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Display
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding
until you hear a
beep will display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
If
is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been pressed for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all.
■ Canceling shuffle and repeat playback
Press
(RAND) or
(RPT) again.
■ Error messages
3
“ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.
“EMPTY”: This indicates that some available songs are not found in a selected playlist.
“UPDATE”: This indicates that the version of the iPod is not compatible. Upgrade
your iPod software to the latest version.
285
Interior features
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Compatible models
Model
iPod
Generation
Software version
5th generation
Ver. 1.2.0 or higher
1st generation
Ver. 1.3.0 or higher
2nd generation
Ver. 1.1.2 or higher
3rd generation
Ver. 1.0.0 or higher
iPod touch
1st generation
Ver. 1.1.0 or higher
iPod classic
1st generation
Ver. 1.0.0 or higher
iPod nano
Depending on differences between models or software version etc., some models
listed above might be incompatible with this system.
iPod 4th generation and earlier models are not compatible with this system.
iPhone, iPod mini, iPod shuffle and iPod photo are not compatible with this system.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
● Maximum number of lists in device: 9999
● Maximum number of songs in device: 65535
● Maximum number of songs per list: 65535
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not connect iPod or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to iPod
● Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become
high, resulting in damage to the player.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is con-
nected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or its ter-
minal.
286
3-2. Using the audio system
Operating a USB memory
Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle
speakers.
■ Connecting a USB memory
STEP 1
Open the cover and connect
the portable audio device.
Turn on the power of the USB
memory if it is not turned on.
3
Type A
Press
.
Press
.
Interior features
STEP 2
Type B
STEP 2
287
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Control panel
Type A
Playback/Pause
Repeat play
Random playback
Folder selection
Displays text message
Silencing a sound
File selection
Power Volume
File selection
288
Search playback
Playback
3-2. Using the audio system
Type B
Playback/Pause
Repeat play
Random playback
Folder selection
Displays text message
Silencing a sound
File selection
3
Power Volume
Interior features
File selection
Playback
Selecting a folder
■ Selecting folders one at a time
Press
() or
() to select the desired folder.
■ Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder
(type A)
Press and hold
reached, press
until you hear a beep. When the desired folder is
once again.
■ Returning to the first folder
Press and hold
() until you hear a beep.
289
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting files
■ Selecting one file at a time
Turn
or press “” or “” on
to select the desired file.
■ Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder (type A)
Press
.
When the desired file is reached, press
once again.
Playing and pausing files
To play or pause a file, press
(
).
Fast-forwarding and rewinding files
To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “” or “” on
hear a beep.
Random playback
■ Playing files from a folder in random order
Press
(RAND).
■ Playing all the files from a USB memory in random order
Press and hold
(RAND) until you hear a beep.
Repeat play
■ Repeating a file
Press
(RPT).
■ Repeating all the files in a folder
Press and hold
(RPT) until you hear a beep.
290
until you
3-2. Using the audio system
Switching the display
Press
.
Each time
is pressed, the display changes in the order of Elapsed time
 Folder name  File name  Album title (MP3 only) Track title 
Artist name.
■ USB memory functions
● Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, the device
itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the
device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as
opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting
it once again may resolve the problem.
3
● If the USB memory still does not begin operation after being disconnected and
■ Display
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding
until you hear a
beep will display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
If
is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been pressed for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all.
■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Press
(RAND),
(RPT),
(type A) again.
■ Error messages
“ERROR”:
This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB
memory.
291
Interior features
reconnected, format the memory.
3-2. Using the audio system
■ USB memory
● Compatible devices
USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback
● Compatible device formats
The following device formats can be used:
• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 mbps)
• File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not
play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in a device: 65025
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255
● MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the
media/formats on which the files are recorded.
292
3-2. Using the audio system
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III,
MPEG2.5)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps)
MPEG2.5: 32-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
● WMA file compatibility
Interior features
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 32-320 (kbps, VBR)
● File names
3
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title,
artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
293
3-2. Using the audio system
● MP3 and WMA playback
• When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in the
USB memory are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or
WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
• When the USB memory is connected and the audio source is changed to
USB memory mode, the USB memory will start playing the first file in the first
folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the contents have
not been changed), the USB memory will resume play from the same point in
which it was last used.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they will be skipped (not played).
● Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of
at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and
WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and
the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result.
In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not connect USB memory or operate the controls.
294
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to USB memory
● Do not leave USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may
become high, resulting in damage to the player.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory while it
is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB memory
or its terminal.
3
Interior features
295
3-2. Using the audio system
Optimal use of the audio system
Adjusting the sound quality
Adjusting the ASL
Changing the sound quality modes
296
3-2. Using the audio system
Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
Press
.
The ASL switches between on and off modes each time
pressed.
is
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the noise
level as you drive your vehicle.
Adjusting sound quality and volume balance
■ Changing sound quality modes
Press
Pressing
.
3
changes the sound mode in the following order:
Interior features
“BAS”“MID”“TRE”“FAD”“BAL”
■ Adjusting sound quality
Press
or
to adjust the level.
Mode
displayed
Sound quality mode
Level
“BAS”*
Bass
-5 to 5
“MID”*
Mid-range
-5 to 5
“TRE”*
Treble
-5 to 5
“FAD”
Front/rear
volume
balance
“BAL”
Left/right
volume
balance
Press 
Press 
Low
High
F7 to R7
Shifts to rear
Shifts to front
L7 to R7
Shifts to left
Shifts to right
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode.
297
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the AUX port
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it
through the vehicle’s speakers.
STEP 1
Open the cover and connect
the portable audio device.
Type A
STEP 2
Press
.
Press
.
Type B
STEP 2
298
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio
device.
3
Interior features
299
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering
wheel.
Operation may differ depending on the type of audio system or navigation system. For details, refer to the manual provided with the audio
system or navigation system.
Turns the power on, selects
an audio source
Increases/decreases volume
Radio mode: Selects a radio
station
CD mode: Selects a track,
file (MP3 and
WMA) and disc
Bluetooth® audio mode:
Selects a track and
album
iPod mode:
Selects a song
USB memory mode:
Selects a file and folder
Turning on the power
Press
when the audio system is turned off.
The audio system can be turned off by holding
beep.
300
down until you hear a
3-2. Using the audio system
Changing the audio source
Press
when the audio system is turned on. The audio source
changes as follows each time
is pressed. If no discs are inserted in
the player, or if the external device is not connected, that mode will be
skipped.
Type A:
FM1FM2SAT1SAT2SAT3CD player
Bluetooth® audioAUXiPod or USB memory
AM
Type B:
FM1FM2CD playerBluetooth® audioAUX
iPod or USB memoryAM
3
Press “+” on
ume.
Hold down
to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the volto continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
Selecting a radio station
STEP 1
Press
to select the radio mode.
STEP 2
Press “”or “” on
to select a radio station.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold
beep.
until you hear a
Selecting a track/file or song
to select CD, Bluetooth® audio, iPod or USB mem-
STEP 1
Press
ory mode.
STEP 2
Press “” or “” on
to select the desired track/file or song.
301
Interior features
Adjusting the volume
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting an album
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
to select Bluetooth® audio mode.
Press and hold “” or “” on
until you hear a beep.
Selecting a folder
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
to select USB memory mode.
Press and hold “” or “” on
until you hear a beep.
Selecting a disc in the CD player
STEP 1
Press
to select the CD mode.
STEP 2
Press and hold “” or “” on
until you hear a beep.
CAUTION
■ To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
302
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Bluetooth® audio system
The Bluetooth® audio system enables you to enjoy music played on a portable digital audio player (portable player) from the vehicle speakers via
wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable of
playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player does
not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not function.
Vehicles with a navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to
the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Vehicles without a navigation system
Title
P. 306
®
Operating a Bluetooth enabled portable player
P. 311
Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player
P. 315
Bluetooth® audio system setup
P. 321
Interior features
Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Page
■ Conditions under which the system will not operate
● If using a portable player that does not support Bluetooth®
● If the portable player is switched off
● If the portable player is not connected
● If the portable player’s battery is low
● If the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
● If metal is covering or touching the portable player
303
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly
accessed. (P. 345)
■ About Bluetooth®
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
■ Compatible models
● Bluetooth® specifications:
Ver. 1.1, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)
● Following profiles:
• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher (Conformed:
Ver. 1.2)
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Conformed: Ver. 1.3)
Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be connected to the Bluetooth® audio system. However, please note that some functions
may be limited depending on the type of portable player.
■ Certification for the Bluetooth® audio system
FCC ID: AJDK018
IC ID: 775E-K018
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen and RSS-210 of
IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
304
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
CAUTION
■ FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure. This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has
very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive
exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) and more between the radiator and person’s body
(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
Interior features
■ Caution while driving
3
Do not connect portable players or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to portable players
Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle
may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
305
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Using the Bluetooth® audio system
■ Audio unit
Display
A message, name, number,
etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and
special characters cannot be
displayed.
Displays information that is
too long to be displayed at
one time on the display (press
and hold)
Selects items such as menu
and number
: Selects an item
: Inputs the selected
item
Bluetooth® connection condition
If “BT” is not displayed, the
Bluetooth® audio system
cannot be used.
306
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Operating the system using voice commands
By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice
commands enable the operation of the Bluetooth® audio system without
the need to check the display or operate
,
and
.
■ Operation procedure when using voice commands
Press the talk switch and follow voice guidance instructions.
■ Auxiliary commands when using voice commands
The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the
system using a voice command:
307
3
Interior features
“Cancel”: Exits the Bluetooth® audio system
“Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction
“Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure
“Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered for the selected function
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Using the Bluetooth® audio system for the first time
Before using the Bluetooth® audio system, it is necessary to register a
Bluetooth® enabled portable player in the system. Follow the procedure
below to register (pair) a portable player:
STEP 1
Press
and select “BT•A MENU” using
,
and
.
Press the talk switch or select “BT•A Setup” using
,
and
.
The introductory guidance and portable player name registration
instructions are heard.
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
Select “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)” using a voice command
or
,
and
.
Register a portable player name by either of the following methods:
a. Select “Record Name” using
,
and
, and say
the name to be registered.
b. Press the talk switch and say the name to be registered.
A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
,
and
.
A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction for
inputting the passkey into the portable player is heard.
STEP 5
STEP 6
Input the passkey into the portable player.
Refer to the manual that comes with the portable player for the operation of the portable player.
308
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Guidance for registration completion is heard.
If the portable player has a Bluetooth® phone, the phone can be registered at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to register a Bluetooth® phone is heard.
STEP 7
Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or
and
. (Bluetooth® phone P. 324)
,
Menu list of the Bluetooth® audio system
First menu
Second
menu
“Setup”
“System
Setup”
Operation detail
“Pair Audio”
Registering a portable player
“Connect”
Selecting a portable player to
be used
“Change Name”
Changing the registered name
of a portable player
“List Audios”
Listing the registered portable
players
“Set Passkey”
Changing the passkey
“Delete Audio”
Deleting a registered portable
player
“Guidance Vol”
Setting voice guidance volume
“Device Name”
Displaying the Bluetooth®
device address and name
“Initialize”
Initializing the system
309
3
Interior features
“BT•A
Setup”
Third menu
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
■ When using a voice command
For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine.
Say the command correctly and clearly.
■ Situations in which the system may not recognize your voice
● When driving on rough roads
● When driving at high speeds
● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
■ Operations that cannot be performed while driving
● Operating the system with
,
● Registering a portable player to the system
■ Changing the passkey
P. 319
310
and
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player
Type A
Playback/Pause
Repeat play
Random playback
Album selection
Displays text message
BT•A menu
3
Power Volume
Interior features
Track selection
Search playback
Playback
311
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Type B
Playback/Pause
Repeat play
Random playback
Album selection
Displays text message
BT•A menu
Power Volume
Playback
Track selection
Selecting an album
To select the desired album, press
() or
Selecting tracks
Press “” or “” on
to select the desired track.
Playing and pausing tracks
To play or pause a track, press
312
(
).
().
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Fast-forwarding and rewinding tracks
To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “” or “” on
until you
hear a beep.
Random playback
Press
(RAND).
Repeat play
Press
3
(RPT).
Press
Interior features
Scanning tracks (type A)
.
Switching the display
Press
.
Each time
is pressed, the display changes in the order of Elapsed time
 Album title  Track title  Artist name.
Using the steering wheel audio switches
P. 300
313
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
■ Bluetooth® audio system functions
Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain functions
may not be available.
■ Display
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding
until you hear a
beep will display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
If
is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been pressed for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all.
■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Press
(RAND),
(RPT), or
(type A) again.
■ Error messages
“Memory Error”: This indicates a problem in the system.
314
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player
Registering a portable player in the Bluetooth® audio system allows the
system to function. The following functions can be used for registered portable players:
■ Functions and operation procedures
Pattern A
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or
,
and
:
● Registering a portable player
1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” 
3. “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)”
3
Interior features
● Selecting a portable player to be used
1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” 
3. “Connect Audio Player (Connect)”
● Changing the registered name of a portable player
1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” 
3. “Change Name”
● Listing the registered portable players
1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” 
3. “List Audio Players (List Audios)”
● Changing the passkey
1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” 
3. “Set Passkey”
● Deleting a registered portable player
1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” 
3. “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)”
315
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Pattern B
STEP 1
Press
to select “BT•A MENU”.
Press the talk switch or select “BT•A Setup” using
,
and
.
STEP 3 Select one of the following functions using a voice command
or
,
and
.
● Registering a portable player
“Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)”
STEP 2
● Selecting a portable player to be used
“Connect Audio Player (Connect)”
● Changing the registered name of a portable player
“Change Name”
● Listing the registered portable players
“List Audio Players (List Audios)”
● Changing the passkey
“Set Passkey”
● Deleting a registered portable player
“Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)”
Registering a portable player
Select “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)” using a voice command or
,
and
, and perform the procedure for registering a portable
player. (P. 308)
316
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Selecting a portable player to be used
Select “Connect Audio Player (Connect)” using a voice command or
,
and
.
Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the portable player to be used by either of the following
methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
,
and
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable
player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the
name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the
talk switch.
Pattern B
STEP 2 Select the portable player to be used using
,
and
.
Pattern A
STEP 3 Press the talk switch and say “From Car” or “From Audio player”,
and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
,
and
.
Pattern B
STEP 1
Select “From Car” or “From Audio”, using
.
,
and
If “From Car” is selected, the portable player will be automatically connected whenever the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in either
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
317
Interior features
STEP 3
3
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Changing the registered name of a portable player
Select “Change Name” using a voice command or
,
and
.
Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the name of the portable player to be changed by either of
the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
,
and
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of desired portable
player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the
name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the
talk switch.
Pattern B
STEP 2 Select the desired portable player name to be changed using
,
and
.
STEP 1
STEP 3
Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using
and
, and say the new name.
STEP 4
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
318
,
,
and
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Listing the registered portable players
Select “List Audio Players (List Audios)” using a voice command or
,
and
. The list of registered portable players will be
read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “BT•A Setup”.
Pressing the talk switch while the name of a portable player is being read
aloud selects the portable player, and the following functions will become
available:
● Selecting a portable player: “Connect Audio Player (Connect)”
● Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
3
● Deleting a portable player: “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)”
Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or
,
and
.
Pattern A
STEP 2 Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
,
and
.
Pattern B
STEP 1
STEP 2
Select a 4 to 8-digit number using
,
and
.
The number should be input 1 digit at a time.
STEP 3
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been
input, press
again.
If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing
essary.
is not nec-
319
Interior features
Changing the passkey
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Deleting a registered portable player
Select “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)” using a voice command or
,
and
.
Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the portable player to be deleted by either of the following
methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
,
and
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable
player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the
name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the
talk switch.
Pattern B
STEP 1
Select the desired portable player to be deleted using
,
and
.
If the portable player to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth® phone, the
registration of the mobile phone can be deleted at the same time. A voice
guidance instruction to delete a mobile phone is heard.
STEP 2
STEP 3
Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or
and
. (Bluetooth® phone P. 324)
■ The number of portable players that can be registered
Up to 2 portable players can be registered in the system.
320
,
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Bluetooth® audio system setup
■ System setup items and operation procedures
Pattern A
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or
,
and
:
(P. 343)
Pattern B
STEP 1
Press
to select “BT•A MENU”.
STEP 2
Select “System Setup” using
,
.
,
and
3
Interior features
Select one of the following items using
:
● Setting voice guidance volume
“Guidance Vol” (P. 345)
STEP 3
and
● Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name
“Device Name” (P. 345)
● Initializing the system
“Initialize” (P. 345)
321
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Hands-free system for mobile phones
The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your mobile
phone without touching it.
This system supports Bluetooth® mobile phones. Bluetooth® is a wireless
data system that allows the mobile phone to wirelessly connect to the
hands-free system and make/receive calls.
Vehicles with a navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to
the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Vehicles without a navigation system
Title
322
Page
Using the hands-free system
P. 326
Making a phone call
P. 334
Setting a mobile phone
P. 338
Security and system setup
P. 343
Using the phone book
P. 347
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
■ Conditions under which the system will not operate
● If using a mobile phone that does not support Bluetooth®
● If the mobile phone is switched off
● If you are outside service range
● If the mobile phone is not connected
● If the mobile phone's battery is low
● If the mobile phone is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
● If metal is covering or touching the phone
■ When using the hands-free system
● The audio system and voice guidance are muted when making a call.
3
● If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.
● Try to face toward the microphone as much as possible when speaking.
● In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:
• When driving on unpaved roads
• When driving at high speeds
• When a window is open
• When the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone
• When the air conditioning is set to high
■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly
accessed. (P. 345)
■ About Bluetooth®
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
323
Interior features
● If the incoming call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
■ Compatible models
Compatible with HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Conformed: Ver. 1.5)
and OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1.
If your mobile phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth®
phone. If your mobile phone supports OPP alone, you cannot use the Bluetooth®
phone.
■ Certification for the hands-free system
FCC ID: AJDK018
IC ID: 775E-K018
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen and RSS-210 of
IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
■ FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure. This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has
very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive
exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) and more between the radiator and person’s body
(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
■ Caution while driving
Do not use a mobile phone or connect the Bluetooth® phone.
324
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to mobile phones
Do not leave mobile phones in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may
become high, resulting in damage to the phone.
3
Interior features
325
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Using the hands-free system (for mobile phones)
■ Audio unit
Display
A message, name, phone
number, etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and
special characters cannot be
displayed.
Displays information that is
too long to be displayed at
one time on the display (press
and hold)
Selects speed dials
Selects items such as menu
and number
: Selects an item
: Inputs the selected
item
Bluetooth® connection condition
If “BT” is not displayed, the
hands-free phone system
cannot be used.
Reception level
326
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
■ Steering wheel switches
Volume
During an incoming call:
Adjusts the ring tone volume
During an ongoing call:
Adjusts the receiver volume
The voice guidance volume cannot be adjusted using this button.
■ Microphone
327
3
Interior features
Off-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system
on/starts a call
On-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system
off/ends a call/refuses a call
Talk switch
Turns the voice command
system on (press)/turns the
voice command system off
(press and hold)
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Operating the system using voice commands
By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice
commands enable the operation of the hands-free phone system without
the need to check the display or operate
,
and
.
■ Operation procedure when using voice commands
Press the talk switch and follow voice guidance instructions.
■ Auxiliary commands when using voice commands
The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the
system using a voice command:
“Cancel”: Exits the hands-free phone system
“Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction
“Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure
“Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered for the selected function
328
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Using the hands-free phone system for the first time
Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register a
mobile phone in the system. The system will enter phone registration
mode automatically when starting the system with no mobile phone registered. Follow the procedure below to register (pair) a mobile phone:
Press the off-hook switch or the talk switch.
The introductory guidance and phone name registration instructions are
heard.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or
,
.
Register a phone name by either of the following methods:
and
3
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
,
and
.
A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction for
inputting the passkey into the mobile phone is heard.
STEP 4
STEP 5
Input the passkey into the mobile phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for the operation
of the phone.
Guidance for registration completion is heard.
If the mobile phone has a Bluetooth® audio player, the audio player can
be registered at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to register a
Bluetooth® audio player is heard.
STEP 6
Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or
and
. (Bluetooth® audio player P. 304)
,
329
Interior features
a. Select “Record Name” using
,
and
, and
say the name to be registered.
b. Press the talk switch and say the name to be registered.
A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Menu list of the hands-free phone system
■ Normal operation
First menu
Second
menu
Third menu
Operation detail
“Callback”
-
-
Dialing a number stored in the
incoming call history memory
“Redial”
-
-
Dialing a number stored in the
outgoing call history memory
“Add Entry”
-
Adding a new phone number
“Change
Name”
-
Changing the registered name
in the phone book
“Delete
Entry”
-
Deleting the registered data
“Phonebook” “Del Spd
Dial”
-
Deleting speed dials
“List
Names”
-
Listing the registered data
“Speed
Dial”
-
Setting speed dials
330
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
First menu
Second
menu
“Security”
“Setup”
“Phone
Setup”
Operation detail
“Set PIN”
Setting a PIN code
“Phbk Lock”
Locking the phone book
“Phbk Unlock”
Unlocking the phone book
“Pair Phone”
Registering the mobile phone
to be used
“Connect”
Selecting a mobile phone to be
used
“Change Name”
Changing the registered name
of a mobile phone
“List Phones”
Listing the registered mobile
phones
“Set Passkey”
Changing the passkey
“Delete Phone”
Deleting a registered mobile
phone
“Guidance Vol”
Setting voice guidance volume
“Device Name”
Displaying the Bluetooth®
device address and name
“Initialize”
Initializing the system
3
Interior features
“System
Setup”
Third menu
331
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
■ Short cut key operation
First menu
Second menu
Operation detail
“Dial XXX (name)”
-
Dialing a name registered in the
phone book
“Phone book add
Entry”
-
Adding a new phone number
“Phone book Change
name”
-
Changing a registered name in
the phone book
“Phone book Delete
Entry”
-
Deleting the registered data
“Phone book List
names”
-
Listing the registered data
“Phone book Set
Speed Dial”
-
Setting speed dials
“Phone book Delete
Speed Dial”
-
Deleting speed dials
“Dial XXX (number)”
-
Dialing by inputting a number
“Phonebook”
332
“Phonebook Unlock”
Unlocking the phone book
“Phonebook Lock”
Locking the phone book
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
■ Automatic volume adjustment
When vehicle speed reaches 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle
speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less.
■ When using a voice command
For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine, # (pound),
 (star), and + (plus).
Say the command correctly and clearly.
■ Situations in which the system may not recognize your voice
● When driving on rough roads
● When driving at high speeds
3
● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
Interior features
● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
■ Operations that cannot be performed while driving
● Operating the system with
,
and
● Registering a mobile phone to the system
■ Changing the passkey
P. 341
333
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Making a phone call
■ Making a phone call
● Dialing by inputting a number
“Dial by number”
● Dialing by inputting a name
“Dial by name”
● Speed dialing
● Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory
“Redial”
● Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory
“Call back”
■ Receiving a phone call
● Answering a phone call
● Refusing a phone call
■ Transferring a phone call
■ Call waiting
■ Using the call history memory
● Dialing
● Storing data in the phone book
● Deleting
334
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Dialing by inputting a number
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Press the talk switch and say “Dial by number”.
Press the talk switch and say the phone number.
Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press the off-hook switch.
b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.
c. Select “Dial” using
,
and
.
Dialing by inputting a name
STEP 1
STEP 2
c. Select “Dial” using
,
and
.
Speed dialing
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Press the off-hook switch.
Press the preset button in which the desired number is registered.
Press the off-hook switch.
335
3
Interior features
STEP 3
Press the talk switch and say “Dial by name”.
Select a registered name to be input by either of the following
methods:
a. Press the talk switch and say a registered name.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. Press the talk switch
when the desired name is read aloud.
Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press the off-hook switch.
b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
When receiving a phone call
■ Answering a phone call
Press the off-hook switch.
■ Refusing a phone call
Press the on-hook switch.
Transferring a phone call
A call can be transferred between the mobile phone and system while
dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the following methods:
a. Operate the mobile phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for the operation
of the phone.
b. Press the off-hook switch.*1
c. Press the talk switch and say “Call Transfer”.*2
*1
: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call
from the mobile phone to the system during a call.
*2:
While the vehicle is in motion, calls cannot be transferred from
the system to the mobile phone.
Call waiting
When a call is interrupted by an incoming call from a third party, the following options will become available:
● Answer the incoming call: Press the off-hook switch. (Press the offhook switch again as necessary to switch back and forth between
calls.)
● Refuse the incoming call: Press the on-hook switch.
336
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Using the call history memory
Follow the procedure below to use a number stored in the call history
memory:
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press the talk switch and say “Redial” (when using a number
stored in the outgoing call history memory) or “Call back” (when
using a number stored in the incoming call history memory).
Select the number by either of the following methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired number is displayed.
Storing the number in the phone book: Select “Store” and then
“Confirm” using a voice command or
,
and
.
Deleting: Select “Delete” and then “Confirm” using a voice command
or
,
and
.
■ Call waiting
● If your phone does not support HFP Ver. 1.5, this function cannot be used.
● Call waiting operation may differ depending on your mobile phone and service
provider.
■ Call history
Up to 5 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming call history
memories.
■ When talking on the phone
● Do not talk at the same time as with the other party.
● Keep the volume of the incoming voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will
increase.
337
3
Interior features
b. Select the desired number using
,
and
.
The following operations can be performed:
Dialing: Press the off-hook switch or select “Dial” using a voice command or
,
and
.
STEP 3
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Setting a mobile phone
Registering a mobile phone in the hands-free phone system allows the system to function. The following functions can be used for registered mobile
phones:
■ Functions and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or
,
and
:
● Registering a mobile phone
1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Pair Phone”
● Selecting a mobile phone to be used
1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Connect Phone (Connect)”
● Changing the registered name of a mobile phone
1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Change Name”
● Listing the registered mobile phones
1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “List Phones”
● Changing the passkey
1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Set Passkey”
● Deleting a registered mobile phone
1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Delete Phone”
Registering a mobile phone
Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or
,
and
,
and perform the procedure for registering a mobile phone. (P. 329)
338
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Selecting a mobile phone to be used
Select “Connect Phone (Connect)” using a voice command or
,
and
.
Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the mobile phone to be used by either of the following
methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
,
and
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired mobile
phone.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Phones”. When the name of
the desired mobile phone is read aloud, press the talk switch.
Pattern B
STEP 1
Select the mobile phone to be used using
.
,
and
339
Interior features
STEP 2
3
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Changing the registered name of a mobile phone
Select “Change Name” using a voice command or
,
and
.
Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the name of the mobile phone to be changed by either of
the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
,
and
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired mobile
phone.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Phones”. When the name of
the desired mobile phone is read aloud, press the talk switch.
Pattern B
STEP 2 Select the desired mobile phone name to be changed using
,
and
.
STEP 1
STEP 3
Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using
and
, and say the new name.
STEP 4
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
340
,
,
and
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Listing the registered mobile phones
Select “List Phones” using a voice command or
,
and
The list of registered mobile phones will be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone Setup”.
.
Pressing the talk switch while the name of a mobile phone is being read
aloud selects the mobile phone, and the following functions will become
available:
● Selecting a mobile phone: “Connect Phone (Connect)”
● Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
● Deleting a mobile phone: “Delete Phone”
3
Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or
,
and
.
Pattern A
STEP 2 Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
,
and
.
Pattern B
STEP 1
STEP 2
Select a 4 to 8-digit number using
,
and
.
The number should be input 1 digit at a time.
STEP 3
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been
input, press
again.
If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing
essary.
is not nec-
341
Interior features
Changing the passkey
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Deleting a registered mobile phone
Select “Delete Phone” using a voice command or
,
and
.
Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the mobile phone to be deleted by either of the following
methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
,
and
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired mobile
phone.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Phones”. When the name of
the desired mobile phone is read aloud, press the talk switch.
Pattern B
STEP 1
Select the desired mobile phone to be deleted using
,
and
.
If the mobile phone to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth® audio player,
the registration of the audio player can be deleted at the same time. A
voice guidance instruction to delete a Bluetooth® audio player is heard.
STEP 2
STEP 3
Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or
and
. (Bluetooth® audio player P. 304)
■ The number of mobile phones that can be registered
Up to 6 mobile phones can be registered in the system.
342
,
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Security and system setup
■ Security setting items and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or
,
and
:
● Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number)
1. “Setup”  2. “Security”  3. “Set PIN”
● Locking the phone book
1. “Setup”  2. “Security”  3. “Phonebook Lock (Phbk Lock)”
● Unlocking the phone book
1. “Setup”  2. “Security”  3. “Phonebook Unlock (Phbk
Unlock)”
● Setting voice guidance volume
1. “Setup”  2. “System Setup”  3. “Guidance Vol”
● Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name
1. “Setup”  2. “System Setup”  3. “Device Name”
● Initializing the system
1. “Setup”  2. “System Setup”  3. “Initialize”
343
3
Interior features
■ System setup items and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using
,
and
:
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Setting or changing the PIN
■ Setting a PIN
STEP 1
Select “Set PIN” using a voice command or
.
STEP 2
Enter a PIN using a voice command or
When using
,
and
,
,
and
and
.
, input the code 1 digit at a time.
■ Changing the PIN
STEP 1
Select “Set PIN” using a voice command or
.
STEP 2
Enter the registered PIN using a voice command or
and
.
STEP 3
Enter a new PIN using a voice command or
.
When using
,
and
,
,
and
,
and
, input the code 1 digit at a time.
Locking or unlocking the phone book
STEP 1
STEP 2
Select “Phonebook Lock (Phbk Lock)” or “Phonebook Unlock
(Phbk Unlock)” using a voice command or
,
and
.
Input the PIN by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
,
and
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the registered PIN.
b. Input a new PIN using
344
,
and
.
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Setting voice guidance volume
STEP 1
Select “Guidance Vol” using
,
and
STEP 2
Change the voice guidance volume using
.
.
,
and
Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name
STEP 1
Select “Device Name” using
STEP 2
Press
and name.
STEP 3
Select “Go Back” using
“System Setup”.
or
,
and
.
to display the Bluetooth® device address
,
and
to return to
STEP 1
Select “Initialize” and then “Confirm” using
.
STEP 2
Select “Confirm” again using
,
and
,
and
.
345
Interior features
Initializing the system
3
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
■ Initialization
● The following data in the system can be initialized:
• Phone book
• Outgoing and incoming call history
• Speed dials
• Registered mobile phone data
• Security code
• Registered Bluetooth® enabled portable player data
• Passkey for the mobile phones
• Passkey for the Bluetooth® audio players
• Guidance volume
• Receiver volume
• Ring tone volume
● Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored to its
original state.
■ When the phone book is locked
The following functions cannot be used:
● Dialing by inputting a name
● Speed dialing
● Dialing a number stored in the call history memory
● Using the phone book
346
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Using the phone book
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or
,
and
:
● Adding a new phone number
1. “Phonebook”  2. “Add Entry”
● Changing the registered name in the phone book
1. “Phonebook”  2. “Change Name”
● Listing the registered data
1. “Phonebook”  2. “List Names”
● Setting speed dials
1. “Phonebook”  2. “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”
3
Interior features
● Deleting the registered data
1. “Phonebook”  2. “Delete Entry”
● Deleting speed dials
1. “Phonebook”  2. “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)”
Adding a new phone number
The following methods can be used to add a new phone number:
● Inputting a phone number using a voice command
● Transferring data from the mobile phone
● Inputting a phone number using
,
and
● Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming call history
347
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
■ Adding procedure
Select “Add Entry” using a voice command or
,
and
.
STEP 2 Use one of the following methods to input a telephone number:
Inputting a telephone number using a voice command:
STEP 1
STEP2-1 Select “By Voice” using a voice command or
,
and
.
STEP2-2 Press the talk switch, say the desired number, and
select “Confirm” using a voice command.
Transferring data from the mobile phone:
STEP2-1 Select “By Phone” and then “Confirm” using a voice
command or
,
and
.
STEP2-2 Transfer the data from the mobile phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for
details on transferring data.
STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Next” until the desired data is displayed, and select “Confirm” using a voice command.
b. Select the desired data using
.
348
,
and
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Inputting a phone number using
,
and
STEP2-1 Select “Manual Input” using
:
,
STEP2-2 Input a phone number using
and press
again.
and
,
.
and
,
Input the phone number 1 digit at a time.
Selecting a phone number from the outgoing or incoming call history:
b. Select “Record Name” using
the desired name.
STEP 4
,
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
and
, and say
,
and
In STEP 4 , selecting “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” instead of “Confirm” registers the newly added phone number as a speed dial.
349
3
Interior features
STEP 3
STEP2-1 Select “Call History” using a voice command or
,
and
.
STEP2-2 Select “Outgoing” or “Incoming” using a voice command or
,
and
.
STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired data is
displayed, and select “Confirm” using a voice command.
b. Select the desired data using
,
and
.
Select the name to be registered by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
,
and
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name.
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Changing the registered name in the phone book
Select “Change Name” using a voice command or
,
and
.
Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the name to be changed by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
,
and
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. When the desired
name is read aloud, press the talk switch.
Pattern B
STEP 1
STEP 2
Select the desired name to be changed using
.
,
STEP 3
Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using
and
, and say the new name.
STEP 4
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
,
and
,
and
Listing the registered data
Select “List Names” using a voice command or
,
and
The list of the registered data will be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to the “Phonebook”.
.
Pressing the talk switch while the desired data is being read aloud selects
the data, and the following function will become available:
● Dialing: “Dial”
● Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
● Deleting an entry: “Delete Entry”
● Setting a speed dial: “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”
350
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Setting speed dials
Select “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” using a voice command or
,
and
.
Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the data to be registered as a speed dial by either of the
following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command
or
,
and
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. When the desired
name is read aloud, press the talk switch.
Pattern B
STEP 1
STEP 3
Select the desired data using
,
and
.
Select the desired preset button and register the data into speed
dial by either of the following methods:
a. Press the desired preset button and select “Confirm” by using a
voice command or
,
and
.
b. Press and hold the desired preset button.
351
Interior features
STEP 2
3
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Deleting the registered data
Select “Delete Entry” using a voice command or
,
and
.
Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the data to be deleted by either of the following methods
and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
,
and
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired phone
number.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. When the name of
the desired phone number is read aloud, press the talk switch.
Pattern B
STEP 1
STEP 2
Select the desired data to be deleted using
.
,
and
Deleting speed dials
STEP 1
STEP 2
Select “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)” using a voice command or
,
and
.
Press the preset button to which the desired speed dial is registered and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
,
and
.
■ Limitation of number of digits
A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.
352
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Your Lexus is equipped with the illuminated entry system to assist in entering the vehicle. Owing to the function of the system, the lights shown in the
following illustration automatically turn on/off according to the presence of
the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, whether the
doors are opened/closed, and the “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode.
3
Interior features
Personal lights (P. 354)
Interior light (P. 354)
Shift lever light (when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode)
Door courtesy lights
Scuff lights (if equipped)
Front foot well lights
Outer foot lights
Turning the instrument panel light control knob fully to the left disables the
shift lever light and front foot well lights.
353
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior light and personal lights
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
If the interior light remain on when the door is not fully closed and the interior light
switch (door position on/off) is on, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Setting (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 586)
Interior light
Door position on/off
On/off
Personal lights
On/off
354
3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features
3
Interior features
Glove box
Auxiliary box (if equipped)
Cup holders
Console box
CAUTION
■ Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause
the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
● Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with
other stored items.
● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored
items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire
hazard.
355
3-6. Using the storage features
Glove box
Glove box
Open (push button)
Lock with the mechanical key
Unlock with the mechanical key
■ Glove box light
The glove box light turns on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Trunk opener main switch
The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. (P. 51)
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an
accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open glove box or the
items stored inside.
356
3-6. Using the storage features
Console box
Console box
Pull up the knob to release the
lock.
Slide the armrest.
Pull up the knob to release the
lock.
Lift the armrest to open.
■ Console box light
3
■ Using the console box to store CD cases
Store a CD case with the hinged portion facing either the front or back of the console
box.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
357
Interior features
The console box light turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
3-6. Using the storage features
Cup holders
Cup holders
Front (press-in type)
To open, press down and release
the front of the cup holder lid.
Front (slide type)
Press the knob to release the
lock.
Slide the armrest.
358
3-6. Using the storage features
Cup holders
Rear
Open the front lid.
Open the rear lid.
■ Cup holder insert
Front (slide type)
3
Rear
Cup holder insert may be removed for cleaning.
359
Interior features
Remove the cup holder insert holding the
base part.
3-6. Using the storage features
Cup holders
CAUTION
■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder (front press-in type, rear)
Do not place anything other than cups or beverage cans in the cup holders. Even
when the lid is closed, items must not be stored in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden
braking and cause injury.
■ To prevent burns
Put a lid on containers with hot liquids inside.
■ When not in use
Keep the cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
360
3-6. Using the storage features
Auxiliary box
Auxiliary box (if equipped)
Push the back part of the lid to
open. Push the lid again to close.
CAUTION
3
■ Caution while driving
361
Interior features
Do not leave open while driving.
Items stored in the auxiliary box may fall out and cause death or serious injury in
case of an accident or sudden stop.
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors
Forward position:
Flip down.
Side position:
Flip down, unhook, and swing
to the side.
362
3-7. Other interior features
Vanity mirror
Open the cover to use.
The light turns on when the
cover is opened.
3
Interior features
363
3-7. Other interior features
Clock
Adjusts the hour.
Adjusts the minutes.
Rounds to the nearest hour.*
*: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29  1:00
1:30 to 1:59  2:00
■ The clock is displayed when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
364
3-7. Other interior features
Satellite switches
The satellite switches can be used to change the settings of various features. Settings are shown on the multi-information display.
■ Operating the satellite switches
STEP 1
Bring up the satellite switch
mode on the multi-information
display.
Press “”, “” or the “ON/OFF”
button.
3
Interior features
STEP 2
Select the item whose setting is
to be changed.
Press “” or “” to display the
item whose setting is to be
changed.
365
3-7. Other interior features
STEP 3
Change the settings.
Press the “ON/OFF” button to
change the settings (e.g. on/off).
■ Items that can be set using the satellite switches
Intuitive parking assist on/off (if equipped)
(P. 208)
Tire pressure warning system initialization
(P. 432)
ID code selection for tire inflation pressure warning system (P. 434)
Vehicle speed indicator on/off and speed setting
(P. 163)
Tacho indicator on/off and engine speed (rpm)
setting (P. 163)
Pre-collision braking function activate/deactivate
(if equipped) (P. 223)
366
3-7. Other interior features
Front seat auto return function on/off (P. 57)
■ Changing the settings
Each item is displayed and its setting can be changed only in the following conditions:
● Intuitive parking assist: When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNI-
TION ON mode.
● Items other than the above: When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
IGNITION ON mode and the vehicle is stopped.
The display will return to the original display if the satellite switches are not operated for an extended period.
Even if the display is in satellite switch mode, it will switch in the event of a warning
or when the radar cruise control (if equipped) is used. If this occurs, press any of the
satellite switches or “DISP” switch on the steering wheel to return the display to satellite switch mode.
367
Interior features
■ Display
3
3-7. Other interior features
Ashtrays
Front
Push the back part of the lid to
open. Push the lid again to close.
Push the lever to remove the
ashtray.
Rear
Pull the ashtray lid to open.
Hold the plate down and pull the
ashtray upwards to remove.
CAUTION
■ When not in use
Keep the ashtray closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■ To prevent fire
● Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, then
make sure the ashtray is fully closed.
● Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.
: If equipped
368
3-7. Other interior features
Cigarette lighter
Push the back part of the lid to
open, and push the cigarette
lighter down.
The cigarette lighter will pop up
when it is ready for use.
■ The cigarette lighter can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■ When not in use
Keep the lid closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
■ To avoid burns or fires
● Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter.
● Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire.
● Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet.
: If equipped
369
3-7. Other interior features
Power outlet
The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less than 10
A.
■ The power outlet can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
■ To prevent the fuse from being blown
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is off.
370
3-7. Other interior features
Seat heaters and ventilators
The seat heaters and ventilators heat the seats and maintain good airflow
by blowing air from the seats.
Heats the seats
Driver’s
seat
Front
passenger’s
seat
The indicator light (amber)
comes on.
The higher the number, the
warmer the seats become.
Blows air from the seats
The indicator light (green)
comes on.
The higher the number, the
stronger the airflow becomes.
3
Interior features
■ The seat heaters and ventilators can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ When not in use
Set the dial to “0”. The indicator light turns off.
: If equipped
371
3-7. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ Burns
● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on
to avoid the possibility of burns:
•
•
•
•
Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled
Persons with sensitive skin
Persons who are fatigued
Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs,
cold remedies, etc.)
● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the
seat and may lead to overheating.
NOTICE
■ To prevent seat heaters and ventilators damage
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects
(needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Turn the switches off when the engine is off.
372
3-7. Other interior features
Floor mat
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model
and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.
Fix the floor mat in place using
the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
The shape of the retaining hooks
(clips) and the fixing procedure
of the floor mat for your vehicle
may differ from those shown in
the illustration. For details, refer
to the floor mat retention clip
installation instructions supplied
with the clips.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the
pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.
■ When installing the driver's floor mat
● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles,
even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats.
● Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat.
● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■ Before driving
● Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in
the correct place with all the provided
retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the
floor.
● With the engine stopped and the shift lever
in P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to
make sure it does not interfere with the
floor mat.
373
Interior features
CAUTION
3
3-7. Other interior features
Trunk features
■ Cargo hooks
Cargo hooks are provided for
securing loose items.
■ Shopping bag hooks
374
3-7. Other interior features
■ Auxiliary box (vehicles with run-flat tires)
STEP 1
Pull the lever upward to lift up
the luggage mat.
STEP 2
The lever can be hooked on the
edge of the trunk.
3
Interior features
375
3-7. Other interior features
■ Using the auxiliary box when the retractable hardtop is open
By attaching the lever of the luggage mat to
the luggage cover, the auxiliary box can be
accessed.
■ Auxiliary box partition
The auxiliary box partition also serves as the
luggage mat support can be removed.
The partition can be removed even when the
retractable hardtop is open.
CAUTION
■ When the cargo hooks are not in use
To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when they are not in
use.
NOTICE
■ When using the luggage mat (with the auxiliary box)
● Always attach the partition.
● Do not place anything that weighs 44 lb. (20 kg) or more on the mat.
■ When closing the trunk
Do not leave the luggage mat lever hooked on the edge of the trunk.
The luggage mat may get damaged.
376
3-7. Other interior features
Garage door opener
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors,
gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, and security systems,
and other devices.
The garage door opener (HomeLink Universal Transceiver) is manufactured
under license from HomeLink.
Programming the HomeLink (for U.S.A. owners)
The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming method below appropriate for the device.
Interior features
Indicator
Buttons
■ Programming the HomeLink
STEP 1
3
Point the remote control transmitter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to
75 mm) from the HomeLink buttons.
Keep the HomeLink indicator
light in view while programming.
377
3-7. Other interior features
STEP 2
Press and hold one of the
HomeLink buttons and the transmitter button. When the
HomeLink
indicator
light
changes from a slow to a rapid
flash, you can release both buttons.
If the HomeLink indicator light
comes on but does not flash,
flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and
remains lit, the HomeLink button
is already programmed. Use the
other buttons or follow the “Reprogramming a HomeLink button”
instructions. (P. 380)
STEP 3
Test the HomeLink operation by
pressing the newly programmed
button.
If a HomeLink button has been
programmed for a garage door,
check to see if the garage door
opens and closes. If the garage
door does not operate, see if your
remote control transmitter is of the
rolling code type. Press and hold
the programmed HomeLink button. The remote control transmitter
is of the rolling code type if the
HomeLink indicator light flashes
rapidly for 2 seconds and then
remains lit. If your transmitter is of
the rolling code type, proceed to
the heading “Programming a rolling code system”.
STEP 4
378
Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink buttons.
3-7. Other interior features
■ Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S.A. owners)
If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the
heading “Programming the HomeLink” before proceeding with the
steps listed below.
STEP 1
Locate the learn button on the ceiling mounted garage door
opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by brand of garage door opener motor.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener
motor for the location of the learn button.
STEP 2
Press the learn button.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3
below.

STEP 3 Press and hold the vehicle's programmed HomeLink button for
If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the
door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third
press and release will complete the programming process by opening
the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize
the HomeLink signal and operate the garage door.
Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system
for any of the remaining HomeLink buttons.
■ Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming all
devices in the Canadian market
STEP 1 Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the surface of the HomeLink.
STEP 4
Keep the HomeLink indicator light in view while programming.
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
Press and hold the selected HomeLink button.
Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control
button for two seconds each until step 4 is complete.
When the indicator light on the HomeLink compatible transceiver start to flashing rapidly, release the buttons.
379
Interior features
2 seconds and release it. Repeat this step once again. The garage
door may open.
3
3-7. Other interior features
Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.
STEP 6 Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink buttons.
■ Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems, home door
locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance.
STEP 5
■ Reprogramming a button
The individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased but can be
reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Reprogramming a
HomeLink button” instructions.
Operating the HomeLink
Press the appropriate HomeLink button. The HomeLink indicator
light should come on.
The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle continues to send a
signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.
Reprogramming a HomeLink button
Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. After 20 seconds, the
HomeLink indicator light will start flashing slowly. Next, while still pressing and holding the HomeLink button, press and hold the button on the
transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a
rapid flash.
380
3-7. Other interior features
Erasing the entire HomeLink memory (all three programs)
Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink memory.
■ Before programming
3
● Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.
the HomeLinkbutton.
■ Certification for the garage door opener
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: CB2070AHL4
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
■ When support is necessary
Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
381
Interior features
● The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away from
3-7. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device
The garage door on other devices may operate, so ensure people and objects are
out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■ Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink Compatible Transceiver with any garage door opener
or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety
standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or
device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.
382
3-7. Other interior features
Compass
The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which
the vehicle is heading.
■ Operation
To turn the compass on or off,
push “AUTO” for 3 seconds.
3
■ Displays and directions
Direction
“N”
North
“NE”
Northeast
“E”
East
“SE”
Southeast
“S”
South
“SW”
Southwest
“W”
West
“NW”
Northwest
Interior features
Display
: If equipped
383
3-7. Other interior features
Calibrating the compass
The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the
earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the
geographic position of the vehicle.
If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will deviate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following.
■ Deviation calibration
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle.
STEP 2
STEP 3
384
Press “AUTO” until a number (1 to
15) appears on the compass display.
Press “AUTO”, and referring to the map above, select the number
of the zone where you are.
3-7. Other interior features
STEP 4
Press “AUTO” again.
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is complete.
■ Circling calibration
If “CAL” appears on the display,
drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/h)
or less in a circle until a direction is
displayed.
If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the
block until the direction is displayed.
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:
● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
● The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interfer-
ence by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a
steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection,
near a large vehicle, etc.).
● The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)
● The battery has been disconnected.
● A door is open.
385
Interior features
■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation
3
3-7. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ While driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
■ When doing the circling calibration
Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.
NOTICE
■ To avoid the compass malfunctions
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.
Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.
■ To ensure normal operation of the compass
● Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's
magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (retractable hardtop, power
windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.
386
3-7. Other interior features
Safety Connect
Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses Global
Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is supported by Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24 hours per
day, 7 days per week.
Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics
hardware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the
Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and Conditions,
as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available at Lexus.com. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such
then-applicable Terms and Conditions.
Interior features
■ System components
3
Microphone
LED light indicators
“SOS” button
: If equipped
387
3-7. Other interior features
■ Services
Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:
● Automatic Collision Notification*
Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service providers. (P. 390)
*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
● Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (P. 391)
● Emergency Assistance Button (SOS)
Connects drivers to response-center support. (P. 391)
● Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (P. 391)
■ Subscription
After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services.
A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact
your Lexus dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) or
push the “SOS” button in your vehicle for further subscription
details.
388
3-7. Other interior features
■ Safety Connect Services Information
● Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth® technology will not be possible dur-
ing Safety Connect.
● Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Lexus models. Con-
tact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics
device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS
satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center
or receive emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription
Service Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available;
charges vary by subscription term selected.
● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle
● Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunica-
tions Act and the device is not TTY compatible.
■ Languages
The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The
Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish. Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.
■ When contacting the response center
You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.
389
3
Interior features
Location will function in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in
Canada, and Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United States
(except Hawaii) and in Canada. No Safety Connect services will function outside of the United States in countries other than Canada.
3-7. Other interior features
Safety Connect LED light Indicators
When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON
mode, the red indicator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off.
Afterward, the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the service
is active.
The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage conditions:
● Green indicator light on = Active service
● Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process
● Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction
(contact your Lexus dealer)
● No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active
Safety Connect services
■ Automatic Collision Notification
In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the
system is designed to automatically call the response center. The
responding agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak
with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the
occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats
the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services
provider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent
to the location.
390
3-7. Other interior features
■ Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities
to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a
police report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1-800-25LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service.
In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle.
Further information is available at Lexus.com.
If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent
that you are not experiencing an emergency.
■ Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already
included warranty-based Lexus roadside service.
Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect
response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such
as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Enhanced
Roadside Assistance services and their limitations, please see the
Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are available at
Lexus.com.
391
3
Interior features
■ Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)
In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to
reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will
determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch
the necessary assistance required.
3-7. Other interior features
Safety information for Safety Connect
Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.
■ Exposure to radio frequency signals
The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power
radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless
phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.
● ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
● NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement) Report 86 [1986]
● ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) [1996]
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers,
and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and
industries reviewed the available body of research to develop the
ANSI Standard (C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in
addition to those standards.
392
3-7. Other interior features
■ Certification for Lexus Enform with Safety Connect
FCC ID: O9EGTM1
FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101
FCC ID: N7NGTM2
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
3
Interior features
393
3-7. Other interior features
394
Maintenance and care
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior............. 396
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior............... 401
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself
maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions............................ 410
Hood........................................... 413
Positioning a floor jack .......... 414
4-2. Maintenance
Engine compartment ............ 416
Maintenance
requirements ........................ 404
Tires............................................. 431
General maintenance .......... 406
Wheels...................................... 445
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs................................ 409
Air conditioning filter ........... 447
Tire inflation pressure............ 441
Electronic key battery.......... 449
Checking and replacing
fuses ......................................... 451
Headlight aim ......................... 466
Light bulbs................................ 468
395
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition.
● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt
and dust.
● Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.
● Wipe away any water.
● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
■ Automatic car washes
● Before washing the vehicle, do the following.
• Fold the mirrors back.
• Remove the antenna. (if detachable)
● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and
harm your vehicle’s paint.
■ High pressure car washes
● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the
windows.
● Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed prop-
erly.
396
4-1. Maintenance and care
■ Aluminum wheels
● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard
brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners.
Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
● Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving
for long distance in the hot weather.
● Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
■ Bumpers
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
■ Front side windows water-repellent coating
● The following precautions can extend the effectiveness of the water-repellent
coating.
■ Outside rear view mirror rain-clearing coating (if equipped)
Observe the following precautions in order to retain the rain-clearing properties of
the mirror.
● Clean the mirrors using car shampoo or glass cleaner that does not contain sili-
cone or an abrasive compound, and rinse thoroughly with water.
● Allow the mirrors to be exposed to direct sunlight for 1 to 2 days.
397
4
Maintenance and care
• Remove any dirt, etc. from the front side windows regularly.
• Do not allow dirt and dust to accumulate on the windows for a long period.
Clean the windows with a soft, damp cloth as soon as possible.
• Do not use wax or glass cleaners that contain abrasives when cleaning the
windows.
• Do not use any metallic objects to remove condensation build up.
● When the water-repellent performance has become insufficient, the coating
can be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer.
4-1. Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■ When cleaning the windshield (vehicles with the rain-sensing windshield wipers)
Off
Set the wiper switch to off.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers
may operate unexpectedly in the following
situations, and may result in hands being
caught or other serious injuries and cause
damage to the wiper blades.
● When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is
touched by hand
● When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor
● If something bumps against the windshield
● If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the
raindrop sensor
■ Caution about the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot. Therefore, do not
touch them while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the exhaust pipe until it has
cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
398
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (alu-
minum wheels etc.)
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
•
•
•
•
•
After driving near the sea coast
After driving on salted roads
If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface
If you see dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings on the paint
After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron
powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with
low humidity when storing the wheels.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
4
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
● Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■ Detachable pole antenna installation and removal precautions
● Before driving, ensure that the antenna is installed.
● When the antenna is removed, such as before entering an automatic car wash,
make sure to store it in a suitable place so as not to lose it. Also, before driving,
make sure to reinstall the antenna in its original position.
399
Maintenance and care
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms
When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side wiper
arm upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning the wipers to
their original position, do so from the passenger side first.
■ When using an automatic car wash (vehicles with the rain-sensing windshield
wipers only)
Set the wiper switch to the off position.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may
be damaged.
400
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep
it in top condition:
■ Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces
with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
■ Cleaning the leather areas
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool
detergent.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe
off all remaining traces of detergent.
4
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining
moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.
Maintenance and care
■ Synthetic leather areas
● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge
or soft cloth.
● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt
and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
401
4-1. Maintenance and care
■ Caring for leather areas
Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or
brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. Excellent
results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■ Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the
belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P. 107)
Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly,
resulting in death or severe injury.
■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the
windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
402
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
● Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or alkaline
solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.
● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other interior
part's painted surface may be damaged.
■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather
surfaces.
● Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park
the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as
they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.
■ Water on the floor
■ Cleaning the inside of the windshield/rear window
● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the windshield/rear window, as this may cause
damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or wire antenna in the windshield. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window
clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
403
Maintenance and care
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into
contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also
cause the body to rust.
4
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular
checks. Lexus recommends the following maintenance.
■ General maintenance
Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself
or by a Lexus dealer.
■ Scheduled maintenance
Should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the
“Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s Manual Supplement/
Scheduled Maintenance”.
■ Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
The use of Lexus Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s Guide”,
“Warranty and Services Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or
“Warranty Booklet”.
■ Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair
shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
404
4-2. Maintenance
■ Reset the maintenance data (U.S.A. only)
After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the maintenance data.
To reset the data, follow the procedures described below:
STEP 1 Switch the display to the odometer (P. 161) when the engine is running.
STEP 2 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
STEP 3 While pressing the trip meter reset button, set the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to the IGNITION ON mode (but do not start the engine
because otherwise the reset mode will be cancelled). Continue to press
and hold the button until the trip meter displays “000000”.
■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer
● Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the
latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all
systems on your vehicle.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been
performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your
vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.
■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained
It could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.
■ Warning in handling of battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile com-
ponents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by compo-
nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash
any affected area immediately.
● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (P. 427)
405
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
4
4-2. Maintenance
General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed
at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Services Guide” or “Owners
Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice
should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service
shop for advice.
Engine compartment
Items
406
Check points
Battery
Maintenance-free.
(P. 427)
Brake fluid
At the correct level? (P. 425)
Engine coolant
At the correct level? (P. 423)
Engine oil
At the correct level? (P. 420)
Exhaust system
No fumes or strange sounds?
Radiator/condenser/hoses
Not blocked with foreign matter?
(P. 425)
Washer fluid
At the correct level? (P. 430)
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle interior
Items
Check points
Accelerator pedal
• Moves smoothly (without uneven
pedal effort or catching)?
Automatic transmission “Park”
mechanism
• Can the vehicle be held securely
on an incline with the shift lever in
P?
Brake pedal
• Moves smoothly?
• Does it have appropriate clearance
and correct amount of free play?
Brakes
• Not pull to one side when applied?
• Loss of brake effectiveness?
• Spongy feeling brake pedal?
• Pedal almost touches floor?
4
• Move smoothly and lock securely?
Indicators/buzzers
• Function properly?
Lights
• Do all the lights come on?
• Headlights aimed correctly?
(P. 466)
Parking brake
• Moves smoothly?
• Can hold the vehicle securely on
an incline?
Seat belts
• Does the seat belt system operate
smoothly?
• Are the belts undamaged?
Seats
• Do the seat controls operate properly?
Maintenance and care
Head restraints
407
4-2. Maintenance
Items
Steering wheel
Check points
• Moves smoothly?
• Has correct free play?
• No strange noises?
Vehicle exterior
Items
Check points
Door/trunk
• Operate smoothly?
Engine hood
• The lock system works properly?
Fluid leaks
• Is there any leakage after parking?
Tire
• Inflation pressure is correct?
• Tire surfaces not worn or damaged?
• Tires rotated according to the
maintenance schedule?
• Wheel nuts are not loose?
CAUTION
■ If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing
maintenance checks.
408
4-2. Maintenance
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include
OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in
the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test
and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service
the vehicle.
■ Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test:
● When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may
not be completely set.
● When the fuel tank cap is loose
4
■ When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the
vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
■ If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
409
Maintenance and care
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure given in these sections.
Items
Battery condition
Brake fluid level
Engine coolant level
410
Parts and tools
(P. 427)
• Warm water
• Baking soda
• Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
(P. 425)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding brake
fluid)
(P. 423)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine,
non-nitrite and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid
technology.
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and
50% deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and
45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine coolant)
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Items
Engine oil level
Parts and tools
(P. 420)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel, funnel (used
only for adding engine oil)
Fuses
(P. 451)
• Fuse with same amperage rating as
original
Tire inflation pressure
(P. 441)
• Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
Headlight aim
(P. 466)
• Phillips-head screwdriver

Radiator and condenser (P. 425)
Washer fluid
(P. 430)
• Water washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel
4
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury,
observe the following precautions.
■ When working on the engine compartment
● Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driv-
ing as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine
compartment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel
and battery fumes are flammable.
● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and
corrosive sulfuric acid.
411
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille
Be sure the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is OFF.
With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric
cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the
coolant temperature is high. (P. 425)
■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting
in the eyes.
NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to
dirt in the air.
412
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
STEP 1
Pull the hood release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
4
Lift the auxiliary catch lever and
lift the hood.
Maintenance and care
STEP 2
CAUTION
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly it may open while the vehicle is in motion and
cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
413
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly.
Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
■ Front
■ Rear
Position the floor jack diagonally
in the direction of the arrow
marked on the underbody
cover.
Do not position the jack on a
straight angle as the exhaust
pipe may block the jack arm,
preventing the jack from being
positioned properly.
414
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When raising your vehicle
Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or serious
injury.
● Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as
the one shown in the illustration.
● When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with the
jack.
● Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
● Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported only by
the floor jack.
● Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.
● Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the shift
lever in P.
● Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
● When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the
floor jack.
● When raising the vehicle, ensure that there is sufficient surrounding space. The
vehicle’s position may change slightly when lowered.
415
Maintenance and care
● Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level surface.
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment
IS350C
Battery
(P. 427)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 420)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 420)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 425)
Fuse boxes
(P. 451)
416
Washer fluid tank
(P. 430)
Electric cooling fans
Condenser
(P. 425)
Radiator
(P. 425)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 423)
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS250C
4
Washer fluid tank
Maintenance and care
Battery
(P. 427)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 420)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 420)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 425)
Fuse boxes
(P. 451)
(P. 430)
Electric cooling fans
Condenser
(P. 425)
Radiator
(P. 425)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 423)
417
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment cover
■ Removing the engine compartment cover
Front
Outside
418
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Installing the clips
Press the tip of the clip against a
hard surface, such as a desk, to
allow the center part of the clip
to be pushed up.
Insert
Press
NOTICE
■ After installing an engine compartment cover
Make sure that the cover is securely installed in its original position.
4
Maintenance and care
419
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■ Checking the engine oil
STEP 1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine
and turning it off, wait more than five minutes for the oil to drain
back into the bottom of the engine.
Hold a rag under the end and pull
STEP 2
the dipstick out.
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
420
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the
oil level.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Low
Full
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the
low level mark, add engine oil of
the same type as already in the
engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Engine oil
selection
Oil quantity
(Low  Full)
Items
STEP 2
STEP 3
1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.)
4
Clean funnel
Maintenance and care
STEP 1
P. 556
Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
421
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in
between oil maintenance intervals.
● When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or
after replacing the engine
● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
● When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or when driving while
accelerating or decelerating frequently
● When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently
through heavy traffic
CAUTION
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin
disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid
prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dis-
pose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
422
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“FULL”
“LOW”
4
423
Maintenance and care
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap, drain cock
and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer pressure test the cap and check for
leaks in the cooling system.
■ Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high-quality ethylene glycolbased non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50%
deionized water. (Enabled: -31F [-35C])
Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45%
deionized water. (Enabled: -44F [-42C])
For more details about engine coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ When the engine is hot
Do not remove the radiator cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is
removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water
and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection
and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it damaging parts or paint.
424
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their
condition, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.
Brake fluid
■ Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
Maintenance and care
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
■ Adding fluid
Fluid type
Items
4
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Clean funnel
■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use
only newly opened brake fluid.
425
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When filling the reservoir
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted
surfaces.
If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or
when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
426
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Battery
Check the battery as follows.
■ Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there
are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
4
Maintenance and care
■ Checking battery fluid
Check that the level is between
“UPPER LEVEL” and “LOWER
LEVEL”.
“UPPER LEVEL”
“LOWER LEVEL”
If the fluid level is at or below
“LOWER LEVEL”, add distilled
water.
427
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Adding distilled water
Low
STEP 1
STEP 2
O.K.
Remove the vent plug.
Add distilled water.
If the “UPPER LEVEL” line cannot be seen, check the fluid level by
looking directly at the cell.
STEP 3
Put the vent plug back on and close securely.
■ Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Therefore, before recharging:
● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the
ground cable.
● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and discon-
necting the charger cables to the battery.
■ After recharging/reconnecting the battery
In some cases, the engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the
system.
STEP 1 Shift the shift lever to P, and turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
STEP 2 Open and close any of the doors.
STEP 3 Start the engine. (If the engine does not start first time, repeat the proce-
dure.)
If the engine will not start even after multiple attempts at the above method, contact
your Lexus dealer.
428
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Chemicals in the battery
A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious
injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
● Keep children away from the battery.
■ Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or
closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
4
■ How to recharge the battery
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while
traveling to the nearest medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and
follow the procedure above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.
429
Maintenance and care
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a
quicker rate.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.
Washer fluid
If any washer does not work or the
warning message appears on the
multi-information display, the
washer tank may be empty. Add
washer fluid.
CAUTION
■ When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as washer fluid contains
alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.
430
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and
treadwear.
■ Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the “TWI” or
“” marks, etc., molded on the
sidewall of each tire.
Check spare tire condition and
pressure if not rotated.
■ Tire rotation
Models with non-directional tires
4
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
Maintenance and care
Front
To equalize tire wear and extend
tire life, Lexus recommends that
tire rotation is carried out at the
same interval as tire inspection.
Models with directional tires
Tires cannot be rotated.
■ The tire pressure warning system
Your Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses
tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 493)
431
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Directional tires
Tire direction marks
The tire sidewalls are marked with
arrows indicating the rolling direction of the tire. If mounted on the
wrong side of the vehicle, directional tires will not perform properly.
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed,
new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire pressure warning
system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (P. 434)
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following
circumstances:
● When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling
speed or load weight, etc.
● When changing the tire size.
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark.
432
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
To initialize the system, use the satellite switch. (P. 365)
STEP 1
Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF.
While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.
STEP 2
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. (P. 563)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on
this pressure level.
STEP 3
STEP 4
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
The tire inflation pressure initialization setting display
Continue to press “” or “” until
the initialization setting display
appears.
Push and hold the “ON/OFF” button until the tire pressure warning
light blinks slowly three times.
STEP 5
Wait for a few minutes with the IGNITION ON mode, and then
turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
433
Maintenance and care
Recording tire inflation pressure
settings
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Registering and selecting ID codes
To select tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes, use the
satellite switch. (P. 365)
■ Registering ID codes
2 sets of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes can be
registered. Once a second set of tires is registered at “2ND”, you can
switch between tire set settings simply by pressing the tire pressure
warning select switch.
There are 2 settings:
“MAIN” position: The ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter on the tires originally installed on the vehicle is registered.
“2ND” position: The ID code is not registered. When you replace a
new set of tires, purchase tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
from your Lexus dealer and have the new ID code registered by your
Lexus dealer.
434
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Selecting ID codes
When replacing tires, make sure to select the ID code set that matches
the new tire set. If the tire pressure warning select switch is set to the
wrong tire setting, the tire pressure warning system will not operate
properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning
light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
Tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter ID code settings display
Press “” or “” repeatedly until
the setting display appears.
Switching ID codes
Press the “ON/OFF” button to
switch between “MAIN” and
“2ND” ID codes.
4
Maintenance and care
435
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the
fabric or bulges indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or
location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.
■ Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered,
the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20
minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
■ Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if they
have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■ If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.
■ Low profile tires
Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be
reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to
use snow tires or tire chains* on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a
speed appropriate for road and weather conditions.
*: Tire chains cannot be mounted on 18-inch tires.
436
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification Label.
For the maximum load of the tire, see the load
limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
mentioned on the sidewall of the tire.
(P. 573)
■ Tire types
1 Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving
under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered
or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires
is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with
snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration
and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
3 Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires.
If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original
equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install
studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction.
Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 233)
■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system
Initialize the tire pressure warning system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to
the specified level.
437
Maintenance and care
2 All season tires
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases,
the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If
repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● When operating the satellite switch, the tire pressure warning light does not
blink 3 times.
● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light
blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for about 20 minutes.
■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure
checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily
vehicle checks.
■ Tire pressure warning system certification
FCC ID: PAXPMV107J
FCC ID: HYQ13BCE
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt
à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est
susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.
438
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Tire pressure warning system operation
The tire pressure warning system may not provide warning immediately if a tire
bursts or if sudden air leakage occurs.
■ When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause
damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics,
which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns. Also, do not mix
tires of remarkably different treadwear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.
● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).
● Do not mix summer, all season and winter tires.
● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
4
■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters
and tire valve caps
● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.
● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those speci-
fied. The cap may become stuck.
439
Maintenance and care
Do not press the satellite switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to
the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on
even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation
pressure is actually normal.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus
dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the
tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 432)
■ Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot holes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the
tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■ Low profile tires and wheels
Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when
receiving impact from the road surface. Therefore pay attention to the following:
● Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may
be damaged more severely.
● Avoid pot holes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards.
Failure to do so may lead to severe tire and wheel damage.
■ If tire inflation pressures become low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
440
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire inflation pressure
■ Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. (P. 563)
4
Maintenance and care
441
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended levels, adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and
adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
Reinstall the tire valve cap.
■ Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
442
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel efficiency
● Reduced driving comfort and tire life
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for
more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure
reading.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures
that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.
4
● Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.
443
Maintenance and care
tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur
and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Poor sealing of the tire bead
● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them as
soon as possible.
444
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling control.
■ Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they
are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim
width, and inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Lexus does not recommend using:
● Wheels of different sizes or types
● Used wheels
● Bent wheels that have been straightened
● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire
chains.
● Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a
plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
■ When replacing wheels
The wheels of your Lexus are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in
the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 432)
445
4
Maintenance and care
■ Aluminum wheel precautions
● Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with
your aluminum wheels.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the
Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.
Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Replacing tire inflation pressure warning valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other
qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.
● Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with nongenuine wheels.
446
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.
■ Removal method
STEP 1 Set the air conditioning system to recirculated mode.
(P. 242)
The air conditioning filter case cannot be removed with the system in
the outside air mode.
STEP 2
STEP 3
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
Open the glove box. Lift and
remove the partition.
4
Remove the filter cover.
STEP 5
Remove the filter case.
Maintenance and care
STEP 4
447
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Replacement method
Remove the air conditioning filter from the filter case and
replace it with a new one.
The “UP” marks shown on the
filter and the filter case should
be pointing up.
■ Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be
required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner's
Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.)
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
NOTICE
■ When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.
448
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.
■ You will need the following items:
● Flathead screwdriver
● Small Phillips-head screwdriver
● Lithium battery (CR1632)
■ Replacing the battery
STEP 1
Take out the mechanical key.
4
Remove the cover.
STEP 3
Remove the depleted battery.
Maintenance and care
STEP 2
Insert a new battery with the “+”
terminal facing up.
449
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ If the electronic key battery is discharged
The following symptoms may occur.
● The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will
not function properly.
● The operational range is reduced.
■ Use a CR1632 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, jewelers, or camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Lexus dealer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
■ When the card key battery needs to be replaced (if equipped)
The battery for the card key is available only at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus dealer
can replace the battery for you.
CAUTION
■ Removed battery and other parts
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking. Keep
away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
450
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown.
If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
STEP 2 Engine compartment (type B fuse box): Remove the engine
compartment cover. (P. 418)
STEP 3 Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment (type A fuse box)
Push the tabs in and lift the lid
off.
STEP 1
4
Maintenance and care
Engine compartment (type B fuse box)
Push the tabs in and lift the lid
off.
451
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Driver's side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
Passenger's side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
Trunk
Remove the lid.
STEP 4
452
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings”
(P. 455) for details about which fuse to check.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 5
Remove the fuse with the pullout tool.
Check if the fuse has blown.
Type A
STEP 6
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found
on the fuse box lid.
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found
on the fuse box lid.
453
Maintenance and care
Type B
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Lexus dealer.
Type D
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Lexus dealer.
Removing the front controller (engine compartment: type B fuse box)
Lift the lid off while pushing the
tabs on either side.
454
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
■ Engine compartment (type A fuse box)
Ampere
Circuit
1
TURN-HAZ
15 A
Emergency flashers, turn signals
2
IG2 MAIN
20 A
IG2, IGN, GAUGE
3
RAD NO.2
30 A
Audio
4
D/C CUT
20 A
DOME, MPX-B
5
RAD NO.1
30 A
Audio
4
6
MPX-B
10 A
Headlights, front fog lights, parking
lights, license plate lights, windshield
washer, power windows, power seats,
electric tilt and telescopic steering
column, meter, smart access system
with push-button start, outside rear
view mirrors, air conditioning system,
retractable hardtop, clock
7
DOME
10 A
Interior lights, meter, outer foot lights
8
CDS
10 A
Power source
455
Maintenance and care
Fuse
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
9
E/G-B
60 A
FR CTRL-B, ETCS, ALT-S, A/F, TEL,
STR LOCK
10
ABS1
50 A
VDIM
11
RH J/B-B
30 A
FR DOOR RH, AM2
12
MAIN
30 A
H-LP R LWR, H-LP L LWR
13
STARTER
30 A
Smart access system with push-button
start
14
LH J/B-B
30 A
FR DOOR LH, SECURITY
15
P/I-B
60 A
INJ, F/PMP, EFI
16
EPS
80 A
Power steering
150 A
LH J/B-AM, E/G-AM, GLW PLG2,
HEATER, FAN1, FAN2, ABS2, RH
J/B-AM, GLW PLG1, RR R/B-AM
17
ALT
18
RR R/B-AM
80 A
DEFOG, PSB, ROOF RH, ROOF
LH, LGG RH, LGG LH, LGG LCK
RH, LGG LCK LH, P-TRAY MAIN,
P-TRAY SIDE
19
GLW PLG1
50 A
PTC heater
20
RH J/B-AM
80 A
OBD, STOP SW, TI&TE, FR P/SEAT
RH, RAD NO.3, ECU-IG RH,
RH-IG, FR S/HTR RH, ACC, CIG,
PWR OUTLET, DOOR DL
21
ABS2
30 A
VDIM
22
FAN2
40 A
Electric cooling fans
23
FAN1
40 A
Electric cooling fans
24
HEATER
50 A
Air conditioning system
25
GLW PLG2
50 A
PTC heater
456
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
26
27
E/G-AM
LH J/B-AM
Ampere
Circuit
60 A
H-LP CLN, FR CTRL-AM, DEICER,
A/C COMP
80 A
FR P/SEAT LH, TV NO.1, A/C, FUEL
OPN, FR WIP, LH-IG, ECU-IG LH,
PANEL, TAIL, MIR HTR,
FR S/HTR LH, TV NO. 2, RR FOG
4
Maintenance and care
457
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Engine compartment (type B fuse box)
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
1
SPARE
30 A
Spare fuse
2
SPARE
25 A
Spare fuse
3
SPARE
10 A
Spare fuse
4
FR CTRL-B
25 A
Headlight high beam, HORN
5
A/F
15 A
Exhaust system
6
ETCS
10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
7
ALT-S
7.5 A
Charging system
8
TEL
10 A
Lexus Enform
9
STR LOCK
25 A
Steering lock system
10
H-LP CLN
30 A
Headlight cleaner
11
A/C COMP
7.5 A
Air conditioning system
12
DEICER
25 A
Windshield wiper de-icer
13
FR CTRL-AM
30 A
WASHER, FR TAIL, FR FOG
458
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
IG2
10 A
15
EFI NO.2
10 A
Fuel system, exhaust system
16
H-LP R LWR
15 A
Headlight low beam (right)
17
H-LP L LWR
15 A
Headlight low beam (left)
18
F/PMP
25 A
Fuel system
19
EFI
25 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system, EFI NO. 2
20
INJ
20 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
21
H-LP UPR
15 A
Headlight high beams
22
HORN
10 A
Horns
23
WASHER
20 A
Windshield washer
24
FR TAIL
10 A
Parking lights, front side marker lights
25
FR FOG
15 A
Front fog lights
459
4
Maintenance and care
14
Ignition system, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Driver’s side instrument panel
Fuse
Ampere
1
FR P/SEAT LH
30 A
Power seat
2
A/C
7.5 A
Air conditioning system
3
MIR HTR
15 A
Outside rear view mirror defoggers
4
TV NO.1
10 A
Display
5
FUEL OPN
10 A
Fuel filler door opener
6
TV NO.2
7.5 A
7
TAIL
10 A
Tail lights, license plate lights, parking
lights, side marker lights
Air conditioning system, display,
clock, cigarette lighter, power steering, headlight cleaner, retractable
hardtop, ECT, ETCS, seat heaters and
ventilators, trunk opener, outside rear
view mirrors, shift lever light, traction
control, audio, instrument panel light
control
8
PANEL
7.5 A
9
RR FOG
7.5 A
460
Circuit
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
10
ECU-IG LH
10 A
Cruise control, air conditioning system, power steering, rain sensor, antiglare inside rear view mirror, shift lock
system, tire inflation pressure warning
system, vehicle stability control
11
FR S/HTR LH
15 A
Seat heaters and ventilators, air conditioning system
12
FR DOOR LH
20 A
Power windows, outside rear view
mirrors
13
SECURITY
7.5 A
Smart access system with push-button
start
14
H-LP LVL
7.5 A
Automatic head light leveling system
LH-IG
10 A
16
FR WIP
30 A
Windshield wipers
4
Maintenance and care
15
Charging system, headlight cleaner,
rear window defogger, electric cooling fans, emergency flashers, turn signal lights, back-up lights, stop lights,
mirror heaters, seat belt pretensioner,
intuitive parking assist, cruise control,
PTC heater, exhaust system, smart
access system with push-button start
461
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Passenger’s side instrument panel
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
1
FR P/SEAT RH
30 A
Power seat
2
DOOR DL
15 A
3
OBD
7.5 A
On-board diagnosis system
4
STOP SW
7.5 A
Stop lights, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection
system, VDIM, shift lock system
5
TI & TE
20 A
Electric tilt and telescopic steering
column
6
RAD NO.3
10 A
Audio
7
GAUGE
7.5 A
Meter
10 A
SRS airbag system, steering lock system, multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system, stop lights, smart access system
with push-button start, occupant
detection system
7.5 A
Audio, clock, air conditioning system,
navigation system, outside rear view
mirrors, smart access system with
push-button start, glove box light,
console box light
8
9
462
IGN
ACC
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
CIG
15 A
Cigarette lighter
11
PWR OUTLET
15 A
Power outlet
12
FR DOOR RH
20 A
Power windows, outside rear view
mirrors
13
AM2
7.5 A
Starting system
14
RH-IG
7.5 A
Seat belt pretensioner, intuitive parking assist, automatic transmission, seat
heater and ventilator
15
FR S/HTR RH
15 A
Seat heaters and ventilators, air conditioning system
10 A
Power seats, headlights, front fog
lights, parking lights, license plate
lights, front side marker lights, windshield washer, outside rear view mirrors, VDIM, air conditioning system,
pre-collision seat belt, electric tilt and
telescopic steering, power windows,
navigation system, vehicle stability
control, retractable hardtop, clock
16
ECU-IG RH
463
4
Maintenance and care
10
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Trunk
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
1
DEFOG
30 A
Rear window defogger
2
ROOF RH
30 A
Retractable hardtop
3
ROOF LH
30 A
Retractable hardtop
4
LGG RH
30 A
Retractable hardtop
5
LGG LH
30 A
Retractable hardtop
6
LGG LCK RH
30 A
Retractable hardtop
7
LGG LCK LH
30 A
Retractable hardtop
8
P-TRAY MAIN
30 A
Retractable hardtop
9
P-TRAY SIDE
7.5 A
Retractable hardtop
10
PSB
30 A
Pre-collision seat belt
■ After a fuse is replaced
● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may
need replacement. (P. 468)
● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
■ If there is an overload in the circuits
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
464
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other
object in place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
● Do not modify fuses or the fuse box.
NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus
dealer.
4
Maintenance and care
465
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Headlight aim
■ Removing the engine compartment cover
P. 418
■ Vertical movement adjusting bolts
Adjustment bolt A
Adjustment bolt B
■ Before checking the headlight aim
STEP 1 Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gas and the area around
the headlight is not deformed.
STEP 2 Park the vehicle on level ground.
STEP 3 Sit in the driver’s seat.
STEP 4 Bounce the vehicle several times.
466
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Adjusting the headlight aim
STEP 1
Turn bolt A in either direction
using a Phillips-head screwdriver.
Remember the turning direction
and the number of turns in mind.
STEP 2
Turn bolt B the same number of
turns and in the same direction
as step 1 using a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
If the error is over the value
specified above, take the vehicle
to your Lexus dealer to adjust
the headlight aim.
4
Maintenance and care
467
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs yourself. For more information about
replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Preparing a replacement light bulb
Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (P. 568)
■ Removing the engine compartment cover
P. 418
■ Front bulb locations
Parking lights (vehicles with
halogen headlights)
Headlight high beam and daytime
running lights (vehicles with
halogen headlights)
Headlight high beam
(vehicles with discharge headlights)
468
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Rear bulb locations
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up lights
4
Maintenance and care
469
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Replacing light bulbs
■ Headlight high beams and daytime running lights (vehicles with halogen headlights)
Release the lock and remove the
STEP 1
cover.
STEP 2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
STEP 3
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
470
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 4
Replace the light bulb, and install
the bulb base.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert.
STEP 5
Turn and secure the bulb base.
Shake the bulb base gently to
check that it is not loose, turn the
headlight high beams and daytime
running lights on once and visually
confirm that no light is leaking
through the mounting.
STEP 6
STEP 1
with the
4
Maintenance and care
When installing the cover install by conducting
directions reversed.
471
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Headlight high beams (vehicles with discharge headlights)
Turn the cover counterclockwise
STEP 1
and remove it.
STEP 2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
STEP 3
Unplug the connector while pulling the lock release.
472
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 4
Replace the light bulb, and install
the bulb base.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert.
STEP 5
Turn and secure the bulb base.
Shake the bulb base gently to
check that it is not loose, turn the
headlight high beams on once and
visually confirm that no light is leaking through the mounting.
STEP 6
STEP 1
with the
4
Maintenance and care
When installing the cover install by conducting
directions reversed.
473
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Parking lights (vehicles with halogen headlights)
Release the lock and remove the
STEP 1
cover.
STEP 2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
STEP 3
Remove the light bulb.
474
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Back-up light
STEP 1
STEP 2
Open the trunk lid and remove the
trunk panel cover clips.
Partly remove the trunk panel
cover and turn bulb bases counterclockwise.
4
Remove the light bulb.
Maintenance and care
STEP 3
475
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Rear turn signal lights
STEP 1
Open the trunk lid and remove the
covers.
STEP 2
Remove the bolts and unit.
STEP 3
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
STEP 4
Remove the light bulb.
476
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Bulbs other than the above
If any of the bulbs listed below has burnt out, have your Lexus dealer
replace it.
● Headlight low beams (vehicles with halogen bulbs)
● Headlight high and low beams (vehicles with discharge bulbs)
● Front fog lights
● Parking/daytime running lights (vehicles with discharge headlights)
● Front turn signal lights
● Front side marker lights
● Side turn signal lights
● Stop/tail lights
● Tail lights
4
● Rear side marker lights
● License plate lights
■ When replacing the front left headlight high beam and parking light bulbs (vehi-
cles with halogen headlights)
Remove the securing bolt and move the
washer fluid filler opening to allow easy
access to the light bulbs.
After replacing the bulbs, make sure to
secure the washer fluid filler opening with the
bolt.
477
Maintenance and care
● High mounted stoplight
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a
malfunction.
● Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.
■ Discharge headlights (if equipped)
If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on, or may
go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is
restored.
■ LED light bulbs
The parking lights (vehicles with discharge headlights), front side marker lights, side
turn signal lights, tail lights, stop/tail lights, high mounted stoplight, rear side marker
lights and license plate lights consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn
out, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light replaced.
CAUTION
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning
off the lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by
the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so may
result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage
the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
● Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam headlight bulbs, connectors,
power supply circuits, or related components.
Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death.
478
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Discharge headlights (if equipped)
● Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing discharge headlights (including light
bulbs).
● Do not touch the high-intensity discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when
the headlights are turned on.
An extremely high voltage of 20000 V will be discharged and could result in
serious injury or death by electric shock.
■ To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
4
Maintenance and care
479
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
480
When trouble arises
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers.............. 482
If your vehicle needs to
be towed................................ 483
If you think something is
wrong ...................................... 489
Fuel pump shut off system.... 490
5
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds... .................................. 491
If a warning message is
displayed................................ 500
If you have a flat tire
(vehicles with standard
tires) ......................................... 513
If you have a flat tire
(vehicles with run-flat
tires) ........................................ 522
If the engine will not start .... 524
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P ....................... 526
If you lose your keys .............. 527
If the electronic key does
not operate properly.......... 528
If the vehicle battery is
discharged ............................ 532
If your vehicle overheats ..... 536
If the vehicle becomes
stuck........................................ 539
If the retractable hardtop
does not close ...................... 540
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an
emergency............................ 550
481
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is involved in an
accident.
Press the switch to flash all the
turn signal lights. To turn them
off, press the switch once again.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the engine is
not running.
482
5-1. Essential information
If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your
Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flat
bed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial
and local laws.
If towing from the rear, the vehicle’s front wheels and axles must be in good
condition. (P. 487)
If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.
Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Lexus dealer before towing.
● The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.
● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Emergency towing
Towing eyelets
483
5
When trouble arises
If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing
eyelet(s). This should only be attempted on hard, surfaced roads for short
distances at low speeds.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.
5-1. Essential information
■ Emergency towing procedure
STEP 1 Release the parking brake.
STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to N.
STEP 3 Put the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY mode or IGNI-
TION ON mode.
CAUTION
■ Caution while towing
● Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on
the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains. Always be cautious of the
surroundings and other vehicles while towing.
● If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not
function, making steering and braking more difficult.
NOTICE
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.
This may cause serious damage to the transmission.
484
5-1. Essential information
Installing towing eyelets
STEP 1
Remove the eyelet cover using a
flathead screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a
rag between the screwdriver and
the vehicle body, as shown in the
illustration.
STEP 2
Insert the towing eyelet into the
hole and tighten partially by hand.
STEP 3
Tighten down the towing eyelet
securely using a wheel nut wrench.
5
When trouble arises
■ Location of the emergency towing eyelet
P. 513
485
5-1. Essential information
CAUTION
■ Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle
Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing. This may
lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.
Towing with a sling-type truck
NOTICE
■ To prevent body damage
Do not tow with a sling type truck, either from the front or rear.
486
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a wheel lift-type truck
From the front
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.
From the rear
Switch to ACCESSORY mode so
that the steering wheel is
unlocked.
5
When trouble arises
487
5-1. Essential information
NOTICE
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.
■ To prevent damaging the vehicle
● Do not tow the vehicle from the rear with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
OFF.
The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheel
straight.
● When raising the vehicle from the rear, ensure adequate ground clearance for
towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the
vehicle could be damaged while being towed from the rear.
Using a flat bed truck
If your Lexus is transported by a
flat bed truck, it should be tied
down at the locations shown in the
illustration.
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs
or the vehicle may be damaged.
488
5-1. Essential information
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs
adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■ Visible symptoms
● Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points
higher than normal
■ Audible symptoms
● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the engine
■ Operational symptoms
● Engine missing, stumbling or running rough
● Appreciable loss of power
5
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches
the floor
489
When trouble arises
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
5-1. Essential information
Fuel pump shut off system
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag
inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to
the engine.
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is
activated.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the ACCESSORY
mode or OFF.
2 Restart the engine.
STEP 1
STEP
NOTICE
■ Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been damaged
and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
490
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or
flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*
(U.S.A.) • Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake booster system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
(Canada)
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully
released the system is operating normally.
*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer
5
P. 503
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle
that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.
491
When trouble arises
Stop the vehicle immediately.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the
system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The electronic engine control system;
(Canada) • The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic automatic transmission control system.
(U.S.A.)
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system.
“ABS” warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS;
(Canada)
• The brake assist system.
(U.S.A.)
Electric power steering system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering)
system.
Pre-collision system warning light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system.
The warning light will operate as follows, even when the system is not malfunctioning:
• The light will flash quickly when the system is operating.
(P. 222)
• The light will flash when the pre-collision braking is disabled. (P. 223)
• The light will flash when the system cannot temporarily be
used. (P. 503)
492
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Slip indicator
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The VSC system;
• The TRAC system; or
• The hill-start assist control system
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning light turns off.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Open door warning light
(warning buzzer)*1
Indicates that a door or the
trunk is not fully closed.
Correction procedure
Check that both side doors
and the trunk are closed.
Low fuel level warning light
Remaining fuel
Refuel the vehicle.
(Approximately 2.9 gal. [11 L,
2.4 Imp. gal.] or less)
(On the center
panel)
When trouble arises
(On the instrument cluster)
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light (warning buzzer)*2
Warns the driver to fasten
his/her seat belt.
5
Fasten the seat belt.
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
Fasten the seat belt.
(warning buzzer)*2
Warns the front passenger to
fasten his/her seat belt.
493
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Correction procedure
Tire pressure warning light
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure
such as
• Natural causes (P. 496)
• Flat tire (P. 513, 522)
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level.
The light will turn off after a
few minutes. In case the light
does not turn off even if the
tire inflation pressure is
adjusted, have the system
checked by your Lexus
dealer.
When the light comes on after
blinking for 1 minute:
Have the system checked by
Malfunction in the tire presyour Lexus dealer.
sure warning system
(P. 496)
Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the
warning light comes on and
flashes to indicate that the
master warning system has
detected a malfunction.
P. 500
*1: Open door warning buzzer
P. 503
*2: Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt reminders buzzer
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts reminder sounds to alert the driver
and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds
intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of at least 12
mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a
different tone for 20 more seconds.
494
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
● Is the fuel empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
■ Electric power steering system warning light
When the voltage is low or drops, the electric power steering system warning light
may come on.
■ Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder and warning
buzzer
● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection
sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound,
even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the
warning light may not operate properly.
5
■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on
495
When trouble arises
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pressing the
satellite switch does not turn off the tire pressure warning light.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air
leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).
■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire (vehicles with a spare tire)
The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even
though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the
repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning
light will turn off after a few minutes.
■ If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used
● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not regis-
tered in the tire pressure warning computer
● If a different set of tires has been selected using the satellite switch.
● If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or higher
The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby
● If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle
● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or
wheel housings
● If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used (Even if you use Lexus wheels, the tire
pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)
● If tire chains are used
■ If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute
when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, have
it checked by your Lexus dealer.
496
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ If the open retractable hardtop warning buzzer sounds
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and open or close the retractable hardtop fully.
CAUTION
■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on
The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold firmly and
operate using more force than usual.
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of
vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
Vehicles with run-flat tires
• Decelerate to the lowest appropriate speed as soon as possible. Do not drive
over 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.
• If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure
adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Have the tire replaced by
the nearest Lexus dealer.
• Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you
could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
Vehicles with standard tires
■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
497
When trouble arises
• Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation
pressure immediately.
• If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure
adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is
flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest
Lexus dealer.
• Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you
could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label).
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) to continue to function properly.
498
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ Precaution when installing a different tire
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.
5
When trouble arises
499
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning message is displayed
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform the following actions:
Master warning light
The master warning light also
comes on or flashes in order to
indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the
multi-information display.
Multi-information display
If any of the warning lights turns on again after performing the following actions, contact your Lexus dealer.
Stop the vehicle immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to
the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
Message
(U.S.A)
(Canada)
(Flashing)
500
Details
Indicates an abnormal engine oil pressure.
The warning light may turn on if the engine oil pressure is too low.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a message is shown. Failure to investigate the cause
of the following messages may lead to the system operating abnormally
and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer immediately.
Message
Details
Indicates a malfunction in the steering lock system.
(Flashing)
Indicates a malfunction in the headlight leveling system.
5
(If equipped)
When trouble arises
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system.
(If equipped)
501
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Message
Details
Indicates intuitive parking assist malfunction.
The malfunctioning assist-sensor is shown flashing on
the display.
(If equipped)
(Flashing)
Indicates a malfunction in the radar cruise control
system.
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the
system, and then press the button again to reactivate
the system.
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the retractable hardtop
system.
502
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
A buzzer sounds and a message is shown. After taking the specified
steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the message goes off.
Message
Details
Correction procedure
Indicates that one or
more of the doors is not
fully closed.
The system also indicates which doors are
not fully closed.
flashes and a
Make sure that all of the
doors are closed.
buzzer sounds to indicate that one or more of
the doors is not fully
closed (with the vehicle
having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
5
Indicates that the hood is
not fully closed.
When trouble arises
flashes and a
buzzer sounds to indiClose the hood.
cate that hood is not fully
closed (with the vehicle
having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
503
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Message
Details
Correction procedure
Indicates that the trunk is
not fully closed.
flashes and a
buzzer sounds to indiClose the trunk.
cate that trunk is not fully
closed (with the vehicle
having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
The vehicle was driven
with the retractable hardtop partially open.
When the vehicle speed
exceeds 1.6 mph
(3 km/h),
flashes
Stop the vehicle in a safe
place and open or close
the retractable hardtop
completely. (P. 86)
and a buzzer will sound.
(Flashing)
504
The “ENGINE START
STOP” switch was turned
off while the retractable
hardtop was partially
open.
Open or close the retractable hardtop completely.
(P. 86)
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Message
Details
Correction procedure
• The roof switch was
operated when there
was an obstacle behind
the vehicle.
• Operation of the
retractable hardtop was
suspended due to an
(P. 86)
obstacle being detected
behind the vehicle.
When the roof switch is
pressed again within two
seconds of message
being displayed, message
will be displayed.
The roof switch was
pressed while the trunk lid Close the trunk lid.
was open.
The roof switch was
pressed while the vehicle
was moving.
(P. 86)
The roof switch was
pressed while there was
not enough power.
Start the engine
505
5
When trouble arises
The roof switch was
pressed while the trunk lid Turn the trunk lid opener
opener main switch was
main switch on. (P. 51)
turned off.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Message
Details
The roof switch was
pressed while the luggage cover was not in the
correct position.
Correction procedure
(P. 86)
Indicates that the parking
brake is still engaged.
flashes and a
buzzer sounds to indicate that the parking
brake is still engaged
(with the vehicle having
reached a speed of 3
mph [5 km/h]).
Release the parking
brake.
Indicates that the washer
Add washer fluid.
fluid level is low.
Indicates that engine oil
level is low.
506
Check the level of engine
oil, and add if necessary.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Message
Details
Indicates that all maintenance according to the
driven distance on the
maintenance schedule*
should be performed
soon.
(U.S.A. only)
Correction procedure
If necessary, perform
maintenance.
Comes on approximately
4500 miles (7200 km)
after the maintenance
data has been reset.
Indicates that all maintenance is required to correspond to the driven
distance on the maintenance schedule*.
(U.S.A. only)
Indicates that the precollision system is not
currently functional.
• Clean the grille and the
sensor.
• Wait until the pre-collision system cools down.
(If equipped)
507
5
When trouble arises
(Flashing)
Perform the necessary
Comes on approximately maintenance. Please reset
5000 miles (8000 km) the maintenance data
after the maintenance is
after the maintenance
performed (P. 405)
data has been reset.
(The indicator will not
work properly unless the
maintenance data has
been reset.)
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Message
Details
Correction procedure
Indicates that intuitive
parking assist is dirty or
covered with ice.
Clean the sensor.
Indicates that the radar
cruise control sensor is
dirty or covered with ice.
Clean the sensor.
Indicates that the radar
cruise control system is
unable to judge vehicleto-vehicle distance.
• Switch the driving mode
to either the normal or
power mode.
• If the windshield wipers
are on, turn them off or
set them to either the
intermittent or the slow
mode.
Indicates that your vehicle is nearing the vehicle
ahead (in radar cruise
mode).
Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.
(If equipped)
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
(Flashing and then continuously on)
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
508
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Message
(Flashing
quickly)
Details
Correction procedure
Indicates that there is a
high possibility of a frontal collision, or that the
pre-collision braking
function is operating.
Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.
(If equipped)
*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
■ Warning light display in dynamic radar cruise mode (if equipped)
In the following cases, the warning light may not be displayed even if vehicle-tovehicle distance closes.
● When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the
vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle
● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed
● Immediately after cruise control speed is set
5
● At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed
When trouble arises
509
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning light turns off.
Interior Exterior
buzzer buzzer
Once
Message

(Comes on for 10 seconds.)
(Flashing)
Once 3 times
(Flashing)
510
Details
Correction
procedure
Indicates that an
attempt was made
to start the engine
without the electronic key being
present, or the
electronic key was
not functioning
normally.
Start the engine
with the electronic key
present.*
Indicates that a
door other than
the driver’s door
has been opened
or closed with the
Confirm the loca“ENGINE START
tion of the elecSTOP” switch in
tronic key.
any mode other
than OFF and the
electronic key
outside of the
detection area.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior Exterior
buzzer buzzer
Message
Once 3 times
(Flashing)
Once
Continuous
(Flashing)
Once
Correction
procedure
Indicates that the
driver’s door has
been opened or
closed with the
shift lever in P, the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch in
any mode other
than OFF and the
electronic key
outside of the
detection area.
Turn the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
OFF or confirm
the location of the
electronic key.
Indicates that the
driver’s door has
been opened or
closed (with the
shift lever out of in • Shift the shift
lever to P.
P, the “ENGINE
• Confirm the
START STOP”
location of the
switch in any
electronic key.
mode other than
OFF and the electronic key outside
of the detection
area).
Indicates that the
key battery is low.

5
When trouble arises
(Displayed alternately)
Details
Replace the battery. (P. 449)
(Flashing)
511
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior Exterior
buzzer buzzer
Once

Details
Correction
procedure

Indicates that a
door has been
opened or closed
and the “ENGINE
START STOP”
switch has been
switched twice to
ACCESSORY
mode from OFF.
Press the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
while applying the
brakes.

Indicates that the
steering lock has
not released
within 3 seconds
of pressing the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
Press the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
again while turning the steering
wheel with the
brake pedal
depressed.
Indicates that the
electronic key
does not operate
properly.
P. 530
Message
(Flashing)
Once



*: If the engine does not start when the electronic key is inside the vehicle, the
electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be difficulties receiving the
signal from the key. (P. 36)
512
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire (vehicles with standard tires)
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.
■ Before jacking up the vehicle
● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to P.
● Close the retractable hardtop. (P. 86)
● Stow the luggage cover. (P. 87)
● Stop the engine.
● Turn on the emergency flashers.
■ Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Jack handle
Jack
Tighten
Loosen
5
When trouble arises
Tool bag
(including towing eyelet)
Spare tire
513
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the spare tire
STEP 1
Lift up the hook of the panel on the
trunk floor.
STEP 2
Secure the panel using the hook
provided.
STEP 3
Loosen the center fastener that
secures the spare tire.
514
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
STEP 1
Chock the tires.
Flat tire
Left-hand
side
Front
Righthand side
Left-hand
side
Rear
Righthand side
STEP 2
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one
turn).
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack is in
contact with the jack point.
515
5
When trouble arises
STEP 3
Wheel chock
positions
Behind the
rear righthand side tire
Behind the
rear lefthand side tire
In front of the
front righthand side tire
In front of the
front lefthand side tire
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 4
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
STEP 5
Remove all the wheel nuts and the
tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
Installing the spare tire
STEP 1
Remove any dirt or foreign matter
from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is in
motion, and the tire may come off
the vehicle.
516
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 2
Tapered portion
Disc wheel
seat
STEP 3
STEP 4
Install the spare tire and loosely
tighten each nut by hand to
approximately the same amount.
Tighten the wheel nuts until the
tapered portion comes into loose
contact with the disc wheel seat.
Lower the vehicle.
Firmly tighten each nut two or
three times in the order shown in
the illustration.
5
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
When trouble arises
STEP 5
Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.
517
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ The compact spare tire
● The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
on the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency.
● Make sure to check the tire pressure of the compact spare tire. (P. 563)
■ When using the compact spare tire
As the compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be warned. Also, if you
replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the
light remains on.
■ If you have a flat rear tire on a road covered with snow or ice
Install the compact spare tire on the front of the vehicle. Perform the following steps
and fit tire chains to the rear tires.
STEP 1 Replace a front tire with the compact spare tire.
STEP 2 Replace the flat rear tire with the tire removed from the front of the vehi-
cle.
STEP 3 Fit tire chains to the rear tires.
■ After completing the tire change
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 432)
518
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to the vehicle
suddenly falling off the jack.
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and
removing tire chains.
● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires
on this vehicle.
● Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.
● Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or
near the vehicle may be injured.
■ Replacing a flat tire
5
● Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while
● Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the
tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
• Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading
to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident.
Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m,
10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
519
When trouble arises
the vehicle is moving.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ When using the compact spare tire
● Remember that your compact spare tire is specifically designed for use with your
vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.
● Do not use two compact spare tires simultaneously.
● Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cornering.
■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is
installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to observe
this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
■ When the spare tire is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may
not operate correctly:
● ABS & brake assist
● VSC
● TRAC
● VDIM
● EPS
● Navigation system (if equipped)
● Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)
● Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped)
● Cruise control (if equipped)
● PCS (if equipped)
520
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel
beyond repair.
■ Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the
vehicle.
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to
when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.
■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.
■ When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
521
5
When trouble arises
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus
dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the
tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 432)
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire (vehicles with run-flat tires)
Take your vehicle to the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer as
soon as possible.
■ Run-flat tires (A “RFT” or “DSST” mark is molded on the sidewall)
You can continue driving a vehicle with run-flat tires even if any
tire goes flat.
It is able to run for a maximum of
100 miles (160 km) at a speed
below 50 mph (80 km/h) after
the tire pressure warning light
comes on. (P. 493)
■ In some condition (such as at high temperatures)
You cannot continue driving for up to 100 miles (160 km).
■ If you cannot distinguish between the standard tires and run-flat tires
Consult your Lexus dealer.
■ Spare tire
A spare tire is not provided on the vehicle with run-flat tires.
■ For the detailed information on run-flat tires
See the tire warranty book.
522
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with the emergency tire puncture repair kit, the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If the emergency tire
puncture repair kit is used, replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter
when replacing the tire.
5
When trouble arises
523
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the engine will not start
If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are
being followed (P. 147), consider each of the following points.
■ The engine will not start even when the starter motor operates
normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
● The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting
procedures. (P. 147)
● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(P. 98)
■ The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● The battery may be discharged. (P. 532)
● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
524
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The battery may be discharged. (P. 532)
● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.
5
When trouble arises
525
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be
a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that
the shift lever can be shifted.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
Set the parking brake.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY
mode.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent.
Press the shift lock override button.
The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.
526
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you lose your keys
New genuine Lexus keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using the other
key and the key number stamped on your key number plate.
5
When trouble arises
527
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate properly
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted
(P. 36) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is
depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and wireless
remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be
opened or the engine can be started by following the procedure below.
Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk
Use the mechanical key built in to the electronic keys to operate the
doors. (P. 29)
Doors
STEP 1
STEP 2
Remove the cover on the driver’s
door handle.
Locks both side doors
Unlocks the door
Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver's door. Turning the key
once again unlocks the passenger’s
door.
528
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 3
After the operation is completed,
reinstall the cover.
Hook the upper claw of the cover
onto the upper catch on the vehicle side, and then push on the
lower side of the cover.
Make sure that the lower claw of
the cover is securely fastened to
the lower catch on the vehicle side.
If the cover is not securely
attached, it may fall off while driving.
Trunk
STEP 1
Remove the cover using a
mechanical key.
5
Turn the mechanical key clockwise to open.
529
When trouble arises
STEP 2
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Starting the engine
STEP 1
STEP 2
Shift the shift lever to P and apply the brakes.
Touch the Lexus emblem side of
the electronic key to the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
An alarm will sound to indicate that
the start function cannot detect the
electronic key that is touched to
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch if any of the doors is opened
and closed while the key is touched
to the switch.
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch within 10 seconds
after the buzzer sounds, keeping the brake pedal depressed.
In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact your Lexus
dealer.
STEP 3
530
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to P and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as you normally do when stopping the engine.
■ Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery depletes. (P. 449)
■ Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes
Within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and press the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
The engine does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is
pressed. (P. 148)
5
When trouble arises
531
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s
battery is discharged.
You can call your Lexus dealer, or qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle
with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Lexus following the steps
below.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Remove the engine compartment covers. (P. 418)
Connecting the jumper cables.
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the
illustration.
STEP 3 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5
minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
STEP 4 Open and close any of the doors with the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF.
532
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode,
then start the vehicle’s engine.
STEP 6 Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order in which they were connected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer
as soon as possible.
STEP 5
■ Avoiding a discharged battery
● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a
low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.
■ Charging the battery
533
5
When trouble arises
The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain
electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges automatically during driving.)
■ When the battery is removed or discharged
Make sure that the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the
battery. The key may be locked in the vehicle if the alarm is activated. (P. 101)
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable
gas that may be emitted from the battery.
● Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not
unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” termi-
nals.
● Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near the
battery.
■ Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts
contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery.
● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to
allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the battery.
● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immedi-
ately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be
received.
● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other
battery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the battery.
534
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ To prevent damaging the vehicle
Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle, because the three-way catalytic converter
may overheat and become a fire hazard.
■ When handling jumper cables
Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or any
of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.
5
When trouble arises
535
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
If your engine overheats:
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the automatic air
conditioning system.
Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.
If you see steam:
Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides and then restart the engine.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.
Check to see if the cooling fan is operating.
If the fan is operating:
Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the
instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the engine.
If the fan is not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and call your local Lexus
dealer.
After the engine has cooled
down sufficiently, check the
engine coolant level and inspect
the radiator core (radiator) for
any leaks.
If the engine compartment
cover needs to be removed:
P. 418
536
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 5
Add engine coolant if required.
Water can be used in an emergency measure if engine coolant
is unavailable. (P. 559)
Have the vehicle checked at your nearest Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■ Overheating
If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating.
● The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is
experienced.
● Steam is coming from under the hood.
5
CAUTION
● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the
steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, causing serious
injury such as burns.
● Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the engine is
running.
● Do not loosen the radiator cap while the engine and radiator are hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released
under pressure.
537
When trouble arises
■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly
can cause damage to the engine.
538
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes
stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever
in P.
Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.
Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide
traction under the tires.
Restart the engine.
Shift the shift lever to the D or R position and carefully apply
the accelerator to free the vehicle.
Turn off TRAC and VSC if these functions are hampering your
attempts to free the vehicle. (P. 216)
CAUTION
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons. The vehicle
may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme
caution.
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine.
● If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may require
towing to be freed.
539
When trouble arises
■ When shifting the shift lever
5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the retractable hardtop does not close
If the retractable hardtop does not close when the switch is pressed, check
that all operating conditions are met. (P. 91)
If the retractable hardtop will not close even though all operating conditions have been met, there may be a malfunction. Immediately have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
As a temporary measure, the following procedure can be performed to
manually close the retractable hardtop.
■ Notes for manually closing the retractable hardtop
● This procedure requires 2 people.
● There is some risk of damage to the vehicle during the procedure,
such as when applying considerable force or removing and
installing various parts. If you are unsure of how to perform this
procedure properly, it is recommended that you contact your
Lexus dealer.
● Protect your hands with gloves etc. when placing them in narrow
spaces.
● Before starting the procedure, turn the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch off.
STEP 1
STEP 2
540
Unlock the trunk. (P. 51)
Open the trunk fully.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 3
STEP 4
Pulling the yellow rings attached to
the left and right sides of the trunk,
raise the front end of the trunk lid.
Holding the parts in the same
places as those shown in the illustrations, lift the trunk lid and move
it as far as possible toward the rear
of the vehicle.
541
When trouble arises
Performing this procedure by holding parts other than those indicated may result in damage to the
vehicle or serious injury.
5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 5
Remove the 2 screws and cover
from each trunk lid hinge.
STEP 6
Remove the bolts and brackets.
542
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 7
Detach the connector on each
trunk lid hinge.
STEP 8
Remove the bolts and connector
brackets.
STEP 9
Remove the 2 bolts and side package tray from each trunk lid hinge.
Support each side package tray by
hand to prevent it from falling
down.
5
When trouble arises
543
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 10
Remove the board on the rear
side.
STEP 1 1
Remove the board on the front
side.
STEP 12
Remove the 6 bolts and rear plate.
STEP 13
Remove the 4 bolts and front plate.
544
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 14
Using an open-end wrench, turn
the six-sided part of the silver rod
as far as possible.
The plate brackets will rise up.
STEP 15
Using a hexagon wrench, remove
the 2 bolts and lock on the left and
right sides of the vehicle.
The lock on the left side of the vehicle can be removed. However, the
lock on the right side of the vehicle
cannot be removed completely as
it is attached to a wire harness.
STEP 16
Holding the parts in the same
places as those shown in the illustration, carefully raise the roof
panel and move it toward the front
of the vehicle.
Let go of the roof panel once it
begins to lower on its own.
The roof panel will not lower completely.
545
When trouble arises
Performing this procedure by holding parts other than those indicated may result in damage to the
vehicle or serious injury.
5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 17
STEP 18
Remove the forward lock cover
located on the ceiling.
Insert the end of the hexagon
wrench and turn it counterclockwise as far as possible to release
the forward lock.
The roof panel will be fully lowered.
Be careful not to catch your hands
or fingers between the roof panel
and vehicle body when releasing
the lock.
STEP 19
Turn the hexagon wrench clockwise as far as possible to lock the
roof panel.
Do not forcibly turn the wrench
beyond the stopping point.
546
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 20
Holding the parts in the same
places as those shown in the illustrations, carefully raise the rear
window panel until it comes into
contact with the roof panel.
Performing this procedure by holding parts other than those indicated may result in damage to the
vehicle or serious injury.
If the rear window panel cannot be
raised, move it lightly up and down
2 or 3 times.
Be careful not to catch your hand
or fingers between the roof panel
and rear window panel.
STEP 21
Remove the rearward lock cover
located on the ceiling.
5
Insert the end of the hexagon
wrench and turn it clockwise as far
as possible to lock the rear window
panel and the roof panel.
Do not forcibly turn the wrench
beyond the stopping point.
547
When trouble arises
STEP 22
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 23
Holding the parts in the same
places as those shown in the illustrations, push the trunk lid down
toward the front of the vehicle until
it locks.
Performing this procedure by holding parts other than those indicated may result in damage to the
vehicle or serious injury.
STEP 24
548
Close the trunk lid.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Parts removed during the manual closing procedure
Keep any parts removed during the procedure inside the vehicle and take all
removed parts and the vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ When manually closing the retractable hardtop
Observe the following precautions:
● Stop the vehicle on a flat surface in a safe place.
● Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.
● Ensure that there are no occupants inside the vehicle.
● Do not perform this procedure while there are strong winds blowing.
● Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
● Be careful not to catch any part of your body or clothing in the moving parts.
● Some parts of this procedure may result in an injury if performed with bare hands.
Protect your hands with gloves or a piece of cloth when performing the procedure.
5
NOTICE
● Drive as slowly as possible. The trunk lid may not be closed securely, causing it to
open due to wind pressure while driving.
● After the procedure is performed, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer as soon
as possible.
549
When trouble arises
■ After the retractable hardtop has been closed manually
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle
in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:
STEP 1
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly
depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the
effort required to slow the vehicle.
STEP 2
Shift the shift lever to N.
If the shift lever is shifted to N
STEP 3 After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
STEP 4 Stop the engine.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
STEP 3 Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible.
Stop the engine by pressing and
STEP 4
holding the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch for 2 consecutive
seconds or more, or press it
briefly 3 times or more in succession.
Press and hold for 2 seconds or more,
or press briefly 3 times or more
STEP 5
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
CAUTION
■ If the engine has to be turned off while driving
Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal
harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as
possible before turning off the engine.
550
Vehicle specifications
6
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) .............. 552
Fuel information..................... 569
Tire information...................... 573
6-2. Customization
Customizable features ........ 586
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize .................... 590
551
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weight
Overall length
182.5 in. (4635 mm)
Overall width
70.9 in. (1800 mm)
Overall height *1
55.7 in. (1415 mm)
Wheelbase
107.4 in. (2730 mm)
Tread
Front
60.4 in. (1535 mm)
Rear
60.4 in. (1535 mm)*2
60.0 in. (1525 mm)*3
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)
*1: Unladen vehicle
*2: Vehicle with 17 inch disk wheels
*3: Vehicle with 18 inch disk wheels
552
660 lb. (295 kg)
6-1. Specifications
Vehicle identification
■ Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used
in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel and in the
engine compartment.
This number is also on the Certification Label.
6
Vehicle specifications
553
6-1. Specifications
■ Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
554
6-1. Specifications
Engine
IS250C
IS350C
Model
4GR-FSE
2GR-FSE
Type
6-cylinder V type,
4-cycle, gasoline
6-cylinder V type,
4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke
3.27 3.03 in.
(83.0  77.0 mm)
3.70  3.27 in.
(94.0  83.0 mm)
Displacement
152.5 cu.in.
(2500 cm3)
210.9 cu.in.
(3456 cm3)
Drive belt tension
Automatic adjustment
Fuel
Fuel type
Unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating
91 (Research octane number 96) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
17.2 gal. (65 L, 14.3 Imp. gal.)
6
Vehicle specifications
555
6-1. Specifications
Lubrication system
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill
reference*)
without filter
with filter
6.2 qt. (5.9 L, 5.2 Imp. qt.)
6.7 qt. (6.3 L, 5.5 Imp. qt.)
*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when exchanging.
Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■ Engine oil selection
IS250C
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus
approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
Outside temperature
556
If SAE 0W-20 is not available,
SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.
However, it must be replaced with
SAE 0W-20 at the next oil
change.
6-1. Specifications
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold
startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of
the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the
oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher
value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or
under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help
you select the oil you should use.
6
Vehicle specifications
557
6-1. Specifications
IS350C
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus
approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
Outside temperature
If SAE 5W-30 is not available,
SAE 10W-30 oil may be used.
However, it should be replaced
with SAE 5W-30 at the next oil
change.
Oil viscosity (5W-30 is explained here as an example):
• The 5W in 5W-30 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold
startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of
the engine in cold weather.
• The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the
oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher
value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or
under extreme load conditions.
558
6-1. Specifications
How to read oil container label:
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you
select the oil you should use.
Cooling system
Capacity
Coolant type
IS350C
9.6 qt. (9.1 L, 8.0 Imp. qt.)
IS250C
10.9 qt. (10.3 L, 9.1 Imp. qt.)
Use either of the following.
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
6
Vehicle specifications
559
6-1. Specifications
Ignition system
Spark plug
Make
Gap
DENSO FK20HBR11
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine.
Electrical system
Battery
Open voltage* at
68F (20C):
12.6 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 12.0 V Discharged
(*: Voltage checked 20 minutes after
the engine and all the lights are turned
off)
Charging rates
5 A max.
560
6-1. Specifications
Differential
Oil capacity
IS350C
1.42 qt. (1.35 L, 1.19 Imp. qt.)
IS250C
1.20 qt. (1.15 L, 1.01 Imp. qt.)
Oil type and viscosity*
Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil LT 75W-85
GL-5 or equivalent
*: Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the
factory. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an
equivalent oil of matching quality that satisfies the above specifications. Please
contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
Automatic transmission
Fluid capacity*
IS350C
8.3 qt. (7.9 L, 7.0 Imp. qt.)
IS250C
7.9 qt. (7.5 L, 6.6 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type
Toyota Genuine ATF WS
*: The fluid capacity is provided as a reference. If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
6
561
Vehicle specifications
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause
deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.
6-1. Specifications
Brakes
Pedal clearance *1
IS 350C
IS 250C
4.13 in. (105 mm) Min.
4.3 in. (108 mm) Min.
Pedal free play
0.04  0.08 in. (1.0  2.0 mm)
Brake pad wear limit
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lining wear limit
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake pedal travel *2
7  9 clicks
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50
kgf) while the engine is running.
*2: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.4 lbf (300 N,
30.6 kgf).
562
6-1. Specifications
Steering
Free play
Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
Tires and wheels
Type A
Tire size
Front tires: 225/45R17 90W
Rear tires: 245/45R17 95W
Spare tire: T125/70D17 98M
Driving under normal conditions
Front:
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)*
Rear:
38 psi (260 kPa, 2.6 kgf/cm2 or bar)*
Front and rear tire inflation presSpare:
sure
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
(Recommended cold tire inflation
*: When driving at high speeds above 100 mph
pressure)
(160 km/h), in countries where such speeds
are permitted by law, add 4.5 psi (30 kPa, 0.3
kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear
tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire
inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
17  8J, 17  4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Vehicle specifications
Wheel size
6
563
6-1. Specifications
Type B
Tire size
Front tires: 225/45R17 91V
Rear tires: 245/45R17 95V
Spare tire: T125/70D17 98M
Driving under normal conditions
Front:
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)*
Rear:
38 psi (260 kPa, 2.6 kgf/cm2 or bar)*
Front and rear tire inflation presSpare:
sure
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
(Recommended cold tire inflation
*: When driving at high speeds above 100 mph
pressure)
(160 km/h), in countries where such speeds
are permitted by law, add 7.2 psi (50 kPa, 0.5
kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear
tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire
inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
17  8J, 17  4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
564
6-1. Specifications
Type C
Tire size
Front tires: 225/40R18 88Y
Rear tires: 255/40R18 95Y
Spare tire: T145/70D17 106M
Driving under normal conditions
Front:
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)*
Rear:
38 psi (260 kPa, 2.6 kgf/cm2 or bar)*
Front and rear tire inflation presSpare:
sure
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
(Recommended cold tire inflation
*: When driving at high speeds above 100 mph
pressure)
(160 km/h), in countries where such speeds
are permitted by law, add 7.2 psi (50 kPa, 0.5
kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear
tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire
inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
Front wheels: 18  8J
Rear wheels: 18 8 1/2J
Spare wheel: 17  4T
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
6
Vehicle specifications
565
6-1. Specifications
Type D
Tire size
Front tires: 225/40R18 88W
Rear tires: 255/40R18 95W
Spare tire: T145/70D17 106M
Driving under normal conditions
Front:
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)*
Rear:
38 psi (260 kPa, 2.6 kgf/cm2 or bar)*
Front and rear tire inflation presSpare:
sure
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
(Recommended cold tire inflation
*: When driving at high speeds above 100 mph
pressure)
(160 km/h), in countries where such speeds
are permitted by law, add 7.2 psi (50 kPa, 0.5
kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear
tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire
inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
Front wheels: 18  8J
Rear wheels: 18 8 1/2J
Spare wheel: 17  4T
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
566
6-1. Specifications
Type E
Tire size
Front tires: 225/40RF18 88V
Rear tires: 255/40RF18 95V
Driving under normal conditions
Front:
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)*
Rear:
Front and rear tire inflation pres38 psi (260 kPa, 2.6 kgf/cm2 or bar)*
sure
*: When driving at high speeds above 100 mph
(Recommended cold tire inflation
(160 km/h), in countries where such speeds
pressure)
are permitted by law, add 11.7 psi (80 kPa,
0.8 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear
tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire
inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
Front wheels: 18  8J
Rear wheels: 18 8 1/2J
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
6
Vehicle specifications
567
6-1. Specifications
Light bulbs
Light Bulbs
Bulb No.
W
Type
Headlights
High beam
Low/high beam (discharge bulbs)
Low beam (halogen bulbs)
9005
D4S
H11
60
35
55
D
A
B
WY21W
21
C
W5W
5
E
H11
55
B
WY21W
21
C
Back-up lights
921
16
E
Outer foot lights

5
E
Vanity lights

1.5
F
Trunk light

5
F
Interior light

5
E
Door courtesy lights

5
E
Front turn signal lights
Exterior
Parking lights (vehicles with
halogen headlights)
Front fog lights
Rear turn signal lights
Interior
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
568
D4S discharge bulbs
H11 halogen bulbs
Wedge base bulbs (amber)
HB3 halogen bulbs
Wedge base bulbs (clear)
Double end bulbs
6-1. Specifications
Fuel information
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
IS250C
Premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (Research Octane
Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance. If 91
octane cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number 91). Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 91 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should be corrected by
refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline.
IS350C
Premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (Research Octane
Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance. If 91
octane cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number 91). Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 91 may result in engine knocking and
significantly reduced performance. Persistent knocking can lead to engine
damage and should be corrected by refueling with higher octane unleaded
gasoline.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of
ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
6
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Lexus dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating
or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
569
Vehicle specifications
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that only
accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
6-1. Specifications
■ Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you
are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this
does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.
■ Gasoline quality standards
● Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a
specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is
expected to be applied worldwide.
● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission
levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted.
● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and
customer satisfaction through better performance.
■ Lexus recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to
avoid build-up of engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to clean
and/or keep clean intake systems, per EPA’s lowest additives concentration program.
● Lexus strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more
information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to
the official website www.toptiergas.com.
■ Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many
areas.
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
570
6-1. Specifications
■ Lexus does not recommend blended gasoline
DO NOT use gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol.
(15% ethanol)
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)
● Use only gasoline containing a maxi-
mum of 10% ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline
that could contain more than 10% ethanol, including from any pump labeled
E15, E30, E50, E85 (which are only
some examples of fuel containing more
than 10% ethanol).
● If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower
than 87.
● Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
■ Lexus does not recommend gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.
6
Vehicle specifications
571
6-1. Specifications
NOTICE
■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be damaged.
● Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.
● Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.
● IS250C: Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 91 may result
in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should
be corrected by refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline.
● IS350C: Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 91 may result
in engine knocking and significantly reduced performance. Persistent knocking
can lead to engine damage and should be corrected by refueling with higher
octane unleaded gasoline.
■ Fuel-related poor driveability
If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
■ When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.
572
6-1. Specifications
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
Standard tire
Compact spare tire
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire size
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Location of treadwear indicators
Tire ply composition and materials
(P. 576)
(P. 575)
(P. 431)
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands
which form the plies in a tire.
573
6-1. Specifications
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is
a bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A
tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure
(P. 437)
(P. 563)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
Summer tire or all season tire
(P. 437)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a
summer tire.
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
(P. 518)
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” molded into its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary
emergency use only.
Run-flat tire (RFT) or standard tire
(P. 576)
This vehicle can be equipped with either run-flat tires (RFT) or standard
tires. A “RFT” or “DSST” mark is molded on the sidewall of the run-flat
tire.
574
6-1. Specifications
Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire manufacturer's identification mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer's optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies that
the tire conforms to applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
6
Vehicle specifications
575
6-1. Specifications
Tire size
■ Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
Run-flat tire code
576
6-1. Specifications
■ Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
6
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read
this information.
577
Vehicle specifications
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S.
Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
6-1. Specifications
■ DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
■ Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and
they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.
578
6-1. Specifications
■ Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing
the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 139.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term
Accessory weight
Meaning
The combined weight (in excess of those standard
items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for
three hours or more, or has not been driven more
than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and
additional weight optional engine
579
Vehicle specifications
Cold tire inflation pressure
6
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire
may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Maximum loaded vehicle
weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows
Production options
weight
The combined weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the
standard items which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or accessory weight,
including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim
Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68
kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity
Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in
the third column of Table 1* below
Recommended inflation
pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer.
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by
style or code
580
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Rim width
Meaning
Nominal distance between rim flanges
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
Vehicle maximum load on
distributing to each axle its share of the maximum
the tire
loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on
the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and
dividing by two
Weather side
The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
6
Vehicle specifications
581
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between components in
the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber
which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
Cord
The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds
Cracking
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of
the tire extending to cord material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim
system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges
pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit
on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses
the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
Groove
The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless
tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire
Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the
carcass
582
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Intended outboard sidewall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must always
face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible
inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire
may be inflated
Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension
requirements
Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to
labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10000 lb. or
less.
Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
6
Vehicle specifications
583
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound between adjacent
plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted
on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
labeling, decoration, or protective bands
Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the tread and bead
Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber compound from the cord
material in the sidewall
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater
than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard
Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test
as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test
Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a
Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces,
and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol (
on at least one sidewall
Test rim
584
)
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be
any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the
road
Tread rib
A tread section running circumferentially around a
tire
Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of
wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly
securely during testing
*:Table 1  Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4
2
2 in front
5 through 10
3
2 in front, 1 in second seat
11 through 15
5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat
7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat
16 through 20
585
6
Vehicle specifications
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by an authorized Lexus
dealership.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
Item
Smart access
system with
push-button
start
(P. 32)
Wireless
remote control
(P. 44)
586
Default setting
Customized
setting
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers)
On
Off
Operation signal
(Buzzer)
On
Off
Driver's door
unlocked in one
step, both side
doors unlocked
in two steps
Both side doors
unlocked in one
step
On
Off
Function
Unlocking operation
Automatic door lock
function to be activated if
door is not opened after
being unlocked
6-2. Customization
Item
Function
Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is
activated if door is not
opened after being
unlocked
Wireless
remote control
(P. 44)
Default setting
30 seconds
60 seconds
120 seconds
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers)
On
Off
Operation signal
(Buzzer)
On
Off
Door lock buzzer
On
Off
Trunk unlocking function
On
Off
Trunk unlocking operation Push and hold
Panic function
Push twice
One short push
On
Off
Driver's door
unlocked in one
step, both side
doors unlocked
in two steps
Both side doors
unlocked in one
step
Speed-detecting automatic door lock function
Off
On
Opening driver's door
unlocks both side doors
Off
On
Shifting gears to P
unlocks both side doors
On
Off
Shifting gears to position
other than P locks both
side doors
On
Off
Unlocking using a key
6
Vehicle specifications
Door lock
(P. 47)
Customized
setting
587
6-2. Customization
Item
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Steering
wheel
(P. 76)
Auto tilt-away function
On
Off
Power windows
(P. 82)
Wireless remote control
linked operation
Off
On
Retractable
hardtop
(P. 90)
Retractable hardtop
operation control linked
to the intuitive parking
assist
On
Off
Light sensor sensitivity
Level 3
Level 1 to 5
Automatic
light control
system
(P. 176)
Lights
(P. 178)
Windshield
wipers and
washer
(P. 182)
588
Time elapsed before
headlights automatically
turn off after doors are
closed
0 seconds
30 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
Daytime running light system (U.S.A. only)
On
Off
Switching operation when
the vehicle is stationary
On
Off
Drip prevention function
On
Off
Time elapsed before the
drip prevention function
operates
Variable
depending on
the vehicle
speed
3 seconds
6-2. Customization
Default setting
Customized
setting
On
Off
Level 3
Level 1 to 5
Distance which a sensor
detects
4.9 ft. (150 cm)
2.0 ft. (60 cm)
Time elapsed before lights
turn off
15 seconds
Item
Intuitive parking assist
(P. 208)
Illumination
(P. 353)
Function
Back sensor operation
display and buzzer
Buzzer volume
7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation when the
doors are unlocked
On
Off
Operation after the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch is turned OFF
On
Off
Front foot well lights
On
Off
Shift lever light
On
Off
Outer foot light
On
Off
Multi-information display (P. 171)
Available language
6
English and French
Vehicle specifications
589
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize
The following item must be initialized for normal system operation in cases
such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is performed on
the vehicle.
Item
When to initialize
Reference
Maintenance data
(U.S.A. only)
After the maintenance is performed
P. 405
Tire pressure warning
system
• When changing the tire inflation
pressure by changing traveling
speed.
• When changing the tire size.
P. 431
590
For owners
7
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners..................... 592
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) ............................. 593
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) ............................. 596
Headlight aim instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) ............................. 604
591
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Tollfree: 1-800-25-LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov ; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
592
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted
from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
● Déroulez la sangle diagonale de
telle sorte qu'elle passe bien sur
l'épaule, sans pour autant être
en contact avec votre cou ou
glisser de votre épaule.
● Placez la sangle abdominale le
plus bas possible sur les
hanches.
● Réglez la position du dossier de
siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le
plus droit possible et calez-vous
bien dans le siège.
● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de
sécurité.
7
For owners
593
Guide de ceinture de sécurité avant
Lorsque vous attachez une
ceinture de sécurité avant,
assurez-vous toujours qu'elle
passe dans le guide.
Lorsque vous accédez aux
sièges arrière ou en descendez,
sortez la ceinture de sécurité de
son guide.
Guide de ceinture de sécurité arrière
Si la sangle diagonale gêne au niveau du cou de l'occupant, attachez la
ceinture de sécurité avec le guide.
594
Entretien et soin
■ Ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède.
Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas
effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.
ATTENTION
■ Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne sont pas
entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. N'utilisez pas
une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture
de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune garantie de protection de l'occupant en
cas d'accident.
7
For owners
595
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted
from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions
in English.
Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS frontaux
Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS conducteur/passager avant
Participent à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur et
du passager contre les chocs avec les éléments de l'habitacle.
Sacs de sécurité gonflables de genoux
Participent à la protection du conducteur et du passager avant.
Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS latéraux
Sacs de sécurité gonflables latéraux tête et thorax
Participent à la protection de la tête et du haut du corps des
occupants aux places avant.
596
Composition du système de sacs de sécurité gonflables
Contacteur de boucle de
ceinture
de
sécurité
conducteur
Capteur de position du siège
conducteur
Contacteur de boucle de
ceinture de sécurité passager
avant
Boîtier électronique de sacs
de sécurité gonflables
Système de classification de
l'occupant du siège passager
avant (ECU et capteurs)
Capteurs de sacs de sécurité
gonflables frontaux
7
For owners
Sacs de sécurité gonflables de
genoux
Sac de sécurité gonflable
passager avant
Témoins indicateurs “AIR
BAG ON” et “AIR BAG OFF”
Sacs de sécurité gonflables
latéraux
Capteurs de sacs de sécurité
gonflables latéraux
Témoin d'alerte SRS
Sac de sécurité gonflable
conducteur
Prétensionneurs de ceintures
de sécurité et limiteurs de
force
597
Votre véhicule est équipé de SACS DE SÉCURITÉ GONFLABLES
INTELLIGENTS (ADVANCED AIRBAGS) conçus selon les normes de
sécurité américaines applicables aux véhicules à moteur (FMVSS208).
Le boîtier électronique (ECU) des sacs de sécurité gonflables régule le
déploiement de ces derniers sur la base des informations qu'il reçoit des
capteurs, etc., indiqués ci-dessus dans le schéma illustrant les
composants du système. Parmi ces informations figurent la gravité du
choc et l'occupation du véhicule par les passagers. Le déploiement
rapide des sacs de sécurité gonflables est obtenu au moyen d'une
réaction chimique dans les dispositifs pyrotechniques, qui produit un gaz
inoffensif permettant d'amortir le mouvement des occupants.
598
ATTENTION
■ Précautions à observer avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
Respectez les précautions suivantes avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables.
À défaut, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s'ensuivre.
● Le conducteur et tous les passagers à bord du véhicule doivent porter leur
ceinture de sécurité correctement.
Les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs de protection
complémentaires aux ceintures de sécurité.
● Le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS conducteur se déploie avec une violence
considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse voire mortelle si le conducteur se
trouve très près du sac de sécurité gonflable. L'autorité fédérale chargée de la
sécurité routière aux États-Unis, la “NHTSA” (National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration) conseille:
La zone à risque du sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur se situant dans les
premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) de déploiement, vous disposez d'une marge de
sécurité confortable en vous plaçant à 10 in. (250 mm) de votre sac de sécurité
gonflable conducteur. Cette distance est à mesurer entre le moyeu du volant de
direction et le sternum. Si vous êtes assis à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous
pouvez changer votre position de conduite de plusieurs façons:
599
7
For owners
• Reculez votre siège le plus possible, tout en continuant à pouvoir atteindre
confortablement les pédales.
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège.
Bien que les véhicules puissent être différents les uns des autres, la plupart
des conducteurs peuvent s'asseoir à une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), même
avec le siège conducteur complètement avancé, simplement en inclinant un
peu le dossier de siège. Si vous avez des difficultés à voir la route après avoir
incliné votre siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et antidérapant pour vous
rehausser ou, si votre véhicule est équipé du réglage en hauteur du siège,
remontez-le.
• Si votre volant de direction est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela a pour
effet d'orienter le sac de sécurité gonflable en direction de votre poitrine
plutôt que de votre tête et de votre cou.
Réglez votre siège selon ces recommandations de la NHTSA, tout en conservant le
contrôle des pédales, du volant de direction et la vue des commandes du tableau
de bord.
ATTENTION
■ Précautions à observer avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
● Si vous attachez une rallonge de ceinture
de sécurité aux boucles de ceinture de
sécurité avant, mais pas au pêne de la
ceinture de sécurité, les airbags SRS
frontaux détectent que le conducteur et le
passager avant ont attaché leur ceinture de
sécurité, alors même que ce n'est pas le
cas. Dans ce cas, il se peut que les airbags
SRS frontaux ne se déploient pas
correctement en cas d'accident, et vous
risquez d'être tué ou grièvement blessé.
Veillez à porter la ceinture de sécurité avec
la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité.
● Le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS passager avant se déploie également avec une
violence considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse voire mortelle si le passager
avant se trouve très près du sac de sécurité gonflable. Éloignez le siège passager
avant au maximum du sac de sécurité gonflable, et réglez le dossier de siège de
sorte à être assis bien droit dans le siège.
● Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou protégés
peuvent être grièvement blessés ou tués par le déploiement d'un sac de sécurité
gonflable. Installez dans un siège de sécurité enfant les enfants trop jeunes pour
pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de sécurité. Lexus recommande vivement d'installer
tous les nourrissons et enfants aux sièges arrière du véhicule et de prévoir pour
eux des systèmes de retenue adaptés. C'est à l'arrière que les nourrissons et les
enfants sont les mieux protégés.
● N'installez jamais un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route sur le siège
passager avant, même si le témoin indicateur “AIR BAG OFF” est allumé. En cas
d'accident, par la violence et la vitesse de son déploiement, le sac de sécurité
gonflable passager avant peut blesser grièvement, voire tuer l'enfant si vous
l'avez installé à la place du passager avant dans un siège de sécurité enfant type
dos à la route.
600
ATTENTION
■ Précautions à observer avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
● Ne pas s'asseoir sur le bord du siège et ne
pas s'appuyer contre la planche de bord.
● Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout
devant le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS
passager avant ou bien s'asseoir sur les
genoux du passager avant.
● Ne conduisez pas le véhicule avec quelque
chose sur les genoux, et n'autorisez pas
non plus le passager à voyager avec
quelque chose sur les genoux.
● Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte.
● Ne laissez personne s'agenouiller sur le
siège passager et se pencher vers la porte
ou bien mettre sa tête ou ses mains à
l'extérieur du véhicule.
7
For owners
601
ATTENTION
■ Précautions à observer avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
● Ne fixez ni ne posez aucun objet sur la
planche de bord, la garniture centrale du
moyeu de volant de direction et la partie
inférieure du tableau de bord.
Au déploiement des sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS conducteur, passager avant
et genoux, tout objet risque de se
transformer en projectile.
● Ne rien fixer aux parties telles que les
portes.
● Si le cache en vinyle recouvre la partie où le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS de
genoux se déploie, veillez à l'enlever.
● N'utilisez aucun accessoire de siège venant recouvrir les zones de déploiement
des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS latéraux, car il risquerait d'en gêner le
déploiement.
● Ne pas faire subir de chocs ou de pressions excessives aux parties renfermant les
composants des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS, illustrées P. 597.
En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un fonctionnement anormal des sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS.
● Ne touchez aucun composant du système immédiatement après le
déclenchement (déploiement) des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS, car ils sont
alors encore très chauds.
● Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement d'un sac de sécurité
gonflable SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l'air frais, ou
bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger. Essuyez tout
résidu dès que possible afin d'éviter d'éventuelles irritations de la peau.
602
ATTENTION
■ Précautions à observer avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
● Si les parties renfermant les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS, telles que la
garniture du moyeu de volant, apparaissent abîmées ou craquelées, faites-les
remplacer par votre concessionnaire Lexus.
■ Modification et mise au rebut des éléments du système de sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS
Consultez impérativement votre concessionnaire Lexus si vous avez besoin
d'intervenir sur votre véhicule ou de procéder à l'une des modifications suivantes.
Le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement ou de
se déclencher (déployer) accidentellement, ce qui pourrait risquer de vous tuer ou
blesser grièvement.
● Installation, dépose, démontage et réparations des sacs de sécurité gonflables
SRS
● Réparation, modification, démontage ou remplacement du volant de direction,
du tableau de bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de la sellerie
● Réparation ou modification des ailes avant, du bouclier avant, ou des flancs de
l'habitacle
● Installation d'un chasse-neige, d'un treuil, etc. sur la calandre (pare-buffle, pare-
kangourou, etc.)
● Modification des suspensions du véhicule
● Installation d'appareils électroniques tels que radio émetteur/récepteur ou
lecteurs CD
● Aménagements du véhicule visant à permettre sa conduite par une personne
atteinte d'un handicap physique
7
For owners
603
Headlight aim instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of headlight aim instructions from the
headlight aim section in this manual.
■ Dépose de l'habillage du compartiment moteur
Avant
Extérieur
■ Vis de réglage dans l'axe vertical
Vis de réglage A
Vis de réglage B
604
■ Avant de vérifier le réglage du faisceau des phares
ÉTAPE 1 Vérifiez que le réservoir de carburant du véhicule est plein et
que la carrosserie autour des projecteurs n'a pas subi de choc
suffisant pour la déformer.
ÉTAPE 2 Stationnez le véhicule bien à plat.
ÉTAPE 3 Installez-vous dans le siège conducteur.
ÉTAPE 4 Donnez plusieurs impulsions à la carrosserie du véhicule de
manière à comprimer/détendre les suspensions.
■ Réglage du faisceau des phares
ÉTAPE 1
Tournez la vis A dans l'un ou
l'autre sens au moyen d'un
tournevis
cruciforme
(empreinte Phillips).
Mémorisez le sens dans lequel
vous avez tourné et le nombre
de tours.
ÉTAPE 2
Tournez la vis B du même
nombre de tours dans le même
sens qu'en étape 1 au moyen
d'un tournevis cruciforme
(empreinte Phillips).
Si l'erreur est supérieure à la
valeur précédemment indiquée,
confiez votre véhicule à votre
concessionnaire Lexus pour
qu'il règle le faisceau des
phares.
7
For owners
605
606
Index
Abbreviation list .................... 608
Alphabetical index.................. 610
What to do if... ....................... 622
For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual” for information regarding
the equipment listed below.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Navigation system
Audio/video system
Air conditioning
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogging
Climate control
Rear view monitor system
Intuitive parking assist
607
Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS
MEANING
ABS
Anti-lock Brake System
AI-SHIFT
Artificial Intelligence Shift
ALR
Automatic Locking Retractor
CRS
Child Restraint System
DISP
Display
ECT
Electronic Controlled Transmission
ECU
Electronic Control Unit
EDR
Event Data Recorder
ELR
Emergency Locking Retractor
EPS
Electric Power Steering
ETCS
Electronic Throttle Control System
GAWR
Gross Axle Weight Rating
I/M
Emission inspection and maintenance
LATCH
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
LED
Light Emitting Diode
MMT
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
M+S
Mud and Snow
MTBE
Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
OBD
On Board Diagnostics
PCS
Pre-Collision System
SRS
Supplemental Restraint System
TIN
Tire Identification Number
TPMS
Tire Pressure Warning System
TRAC
Traction Control
VDIM
Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management
608
Abbreviation list
ABBREVIATIONS
MEANING
VIN
Vehicle Identification Number
VSC
Vehicle Stability Control
609
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A A/C* ..........................................................242
ABS.............................................................. 214
Air conditioning filter .......................... 447
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter ....................... 447
Automatic air conditioning
system.................................................. 242
Airbags
Airbag operating conditions......... 108
Airbag precautions for your
child...........................................................112
Airbag warning light ........................ 492
Front passenger occupant
classification system..........................117
General airbag precautions ............112
Locations of airbags.......................... 106
Modification and disposal of
airbags.................................................... 116
Proper driving posture ............104, 112
Side airbag operating
conditions............................................ 109
Side airbag precautions .....................112
SRS airbags ........................................... 106
Alarm ..........................................................100
Antenna* ................................................... 261
Anti-lock brake system ....................... 214
Ashtrays................................................... 368
Audio input*............................................298
610
Audio system*
Antenna.................................................... 261
AUX port.............................................. 298
Bluetooth® audio .............................303
CD player/changer..........................264
iPod ...........................................................279
MP3/WMA disc..................................271
Optimal use ......................................... 296
Portable music player..................... 298
Radio ....................................................... 256
Steering wheel audio switch........300
USB memory .......................................287
USB port ................................................287
Automatic air conditioning
system*.................................................. 242
Automatic headlight leveling
system ......................................................179
Automatic light control system.........176
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission .....................151
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P................................... 526
S mode .....................................................155
AUX port* ..............................................298
Alphabetical index
B Back-up lights
Wattage .................................................568
Battery
Checking................................................427
If the vehicle has a discharged
battery.................................................. 532
Preparing and checking
before winter.................................... 233
Bluetooth® audio* .............................. 303
Bluetooth® phone*..............................322
Brake
Fluid.......................................................... 425
Parking brake........................................159
Brake assist............................................... 214
C Care
Exterior ...................................................396
Interior.......................................................401
Seat belts ............................................... 402
Cargo capacity ......................................229
Cargo hooks ...........................................374
CD changer* ..........................................264
CD player* ..............................................264
Chains....................................................... 233
Child restraint system
Booster seats, definition ...................122
Booster seats, installation ................129
Convertible seats, definition...........122
Convertible seats, installation........129
Front passenger occupant
classification system......................... 117
Infant seats, definition.........................122
Infant seats, installation ......................129
Installing CRS with LATCH
anchors..................................................127
Installing CRS with seat belts.........129
Installing CRS with top straps........132
Child safety
Airbag precautions.............................. 112
Battery precautions ..............429, 534
Child restraint system........................122
How your child should wear
the seat belt .......................................... 73
Installing child restraints....................126
Power window lock switch..............83
Power window precautions ........... 85
Removed electronic key battery
precautions....................................... 450
Seat belt guide..........................................71
Seat belt extender precautions......75
Seat belt precautions .......................... 74
Seat heater precautions.................. 372
Trunk precautions.................................53
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
611
Alphabetical index
Cigarette lighter....................................369
Cleaning
Exterior ...................................................396
Interior...................................................... 401
Seat belts................................................402
Clock .........................................................364
Compass ................................................. 383
Condenser ..............................................425
Console box ...........................................357
Cooling system
Engine overheating ..........................536
Cornering assist sensors .................. 208
Cruise control
Cruise control ...................................... 190
Dynamic radar cruise control .......194
Cup holder ............................................. 358
Customizable features ...................... 586
612
D Daytime running light system............178
Defogger*
Rear window ......................................... 251
Side mirror.............................................. 251
Dimension ...............................................552
Dinghy towing........................................238
Display
Dynamic radar cruise control....... 194
Satellite switch mode....................... 365
Trip information.....................................172
Warning message ............................500
Do-it-yourself maintenance.............. 410
Door courtesy lights
Door courtesy lights ........................ 353
Wattage .................................................568
Doors
Door lock .................................32, 44, 47
Door windows........................................82
Side mirrors..............................................79
Driver's seat belt reminder light..... 493
Driving
Correct posture...................................104
Procedures.............................................138
Driving position memory........................61
Alphabetical index
E Electric power steering ....................... 214
Electronic key
If the electronic key does not
operate properly............................528
Emergency, in case of
If a warning message is
displayed........................................... 500
If the electronic key does not
operate properly............................528
If the engine will not start............... 524
If the retractable hardtop
does not close .................................540
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P................................... 526
If the vehicle has a discharged
battery.................................................. 532
If the warning buzzer sounds........491
If the warning light turns on............491
If you have a flat tire ..........................513
If you lose your keys .........................527
If you think something is
wrong...................................................489
If your vehicle becomes stuck ....539
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency .........550
If your vehicle needs to be
towed...................................................483
If your vehicle overheats................536
Emergency flashers
Switch...................................................... 482
Engine
Compartment....................................... 416
Engine switch.........................................147
Hood......................................................... 413
How to start the engine ....................147
Identification number ...................... 553
If the engine will not start................524
Ignition switch........................................147
Overheating ........................................ 536
Engine compartment cover .............. 418
Engine coolant
Capacity ................................................ 559
Checking ...............................................423
Preparing and checking
before winter ....................................233
Engine coolant temperature
gauge.........................................................161
Engine immobilizer system..................98
Engine oil
Capacity ................................................ 556
Checking ...............................................420
Preparing and checking
before winter ....................................233
EPS .............................................................. 214
Event data recorder ............................... 22
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
613
Alphabetical index
F
614
Floor mat ..................................................373
Fluid
Brake........................................................425
Washer...................................................430
Fog lights
Switch ....................................................... 180
Wattage................................................. 568
Foot well lights .......................................353
Front fog lights
Switch ....................................................... 180
Wattage................................................. 568
Front passenger occupant
classification system ............................117
Front passenger's seat belt
reminder light......................................493
Front seats
Adjustment...............................................55
Driving position memory....................61
Seat position memory ........................65
Front turn signal lights
Switch ....................................................... 158
Wattage................................................. 568
Fuel
Capacity ................................................555
Fuel gauge................................................161
Fuel pump shut off system............490
Information ...........................................569
Refueling................................................... 95
Fuel door..................................................... 95
Fuel filler door........................................... 95
Fuel pump shut off system.................490
Fuses ............................................................451
G Garage door opener...........................377
Gauges........................................................ 161
Glove box................................................356
Glove box light......................................356
H Hands-free system
for mobile phone*............................. 322
Hazard lights
Switch...................................................... 482
Head restraints
Adjusting ..................................................67
Headlight aim......................................... 467
Headlight cleaner.................................. 189
Alphabetical index
Headlights
Discharge headlight
precautions ....................................... 479
Replacing light bulbs .......................468
Switch........................................................ 176
Wattage .................................................568
Heaters
Seat heaters............................................ 371
Side mirror..............................................251
Hill-start assist control ....................... 220
Hood ...........................................................413
Hooks
Cargo.......................................................374
Shopping bag.......................................374
Horn.............................................................160
I
I/M test......................................................409
Identification
Engine..................................................... 553
Vehicle ................................................... 553
Ignition switch...........................................147
Illuminated entry system ....................353
Indicator lights..........................................167
Initialization
Items to initialize ................................590
Inside rear view mirror ..........................78
Interior lights
Interior lights........................................ 353
Switch.......................................................354
Wattage.................................................568
J
Jack
Positioning a floor jack......................414
Vehicle-equipped jack .................... 513
Jack handle............................................... 513
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
615
Alphabetical index
K Keyless entry..............................................44
Keys
Electronic key......................................... 28
Engine switch.........................................147
If the electronic key does not
operate properly ............................528
If you lose your keys......................... 527
Key number............................................. 28
Keyless entry........................................... 44
Keys............................................................. 28
Mechanical key...................................... 29
Wireless remote control key.......... 44
L
616
Light bulbs
Replacing...............................................468
Wattage................................................. 568
Lights
Door courtesy lights.........................353
Emergency flasher switch .............482
Fog light switch.................................... 180
Hazard light switch...........................482
Headlights switch ................................176
Interior light switch............................354
Outer foot lights.................................353
Personal light switch ........................354
Replacing light bulbs........................468
Scuff lights..............................................353
Shift lever light .....................................353
Turn signal lever.................................. 158
Vanity lights ..........................................363
Wattage................................................. 568
Load capacity .........................................232
M Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance...........410
General maintenance.....................406
Maintenance data ............................. 552
Maintenance requirements.......... 404
Meter
Instrument panel light control....... 162
Meters.........................................................161
Micro dust and pollen filter* ............ 246
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror .......................78
Side mirror heater............................... 251
Side mirrors..............................................79
Vanity mirrors..................................... 363
MP3 disc*..................................................271
Multi-information display..................... 171
N
Noise from under vehicle ......................19
Alphabetical index
O Odometer.................................................. 161
Oil
Engine oil............................................... 420
Opener
Fuel filler door ........................................ 95
Hood .........................................................413
Trunk............................................................. 51
Outer foot lights
Outer foot lights.................................353
Wattage .................................................568
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding ..........................79
Mirror position memory ..................... 61
Outside temperature display............ 172
Overheating, Engine .......................... 536
P
Parking assist sensors*...................... 208
Parking brake.......................................... 159
Parking lights
Replacing light bulbs....................... 468
Switch.........................................................176
Wattage.................................................568
PCS ............................................................ 222
Personal lights
Switch.......................................................354
Power outlet............................................370
Power windows ........................................82
Pre-collision system............................. 222
R
Radar cruise control............................. 194
Radiator ....................................................425
Radio*........................................................256
RDS* ..........................................................258
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs....................... 468
Wattage.................................................568
Rear view mirror
Compass............................................... 383
Rear window defogger* ..................... 251
Replacing
Electronic key battery......................449
Fuses.......................................................... 451
Light bulbs............................................ 468
Tires ........................................................... 513
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners..........................................592
Reset the maintenance data.............405
Retractable hardtop ...............................86
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
617
Alphabetical index
S
618
Safety connect .......................................387
Scuff lights................................................353
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt........................ 70
Automatic locking retractor.............72
Child restraint system
installation ............................................126
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belts.....................................402
Emergency locking retractor ..........72
How to wear your seat belt............. 70
How your child should wear
the seat belt...........................................73
Pregnant women,
proper seat belt use..........................73
Reminder light.....................................493
Seat belt extenders...............................73
Seat belt guide ......................................... 71
Seat belt pretensioners.......................72
Seat heaters ............................................. 371
Seat position memory............................65
Seat ventilators ....................................... 371
Seating capacity ....................................232
Seats
Adjustment .............................................. 55
Adjustment precautions ................... 60
Child seats/child restraint
system installation............................ 126
Cleaning ..................................................401
Driver’s seat position memory ........ 61
Front passenger seat position
memory ................................................. 65
Head restraint .........................................67
Properly sitting in the seat...............104
Seat heaters ........................................... 371
Ventilated seats.................................... 371
Service reminder indicators .............167
Shift lever
Automatic transmission .....................151
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P................................... 526
Shift lever light .......................................353
Shift lock system.................................... 526
Shopping bag hooks ........................... 374
Side airbags ............................................. 106
Side marker lights
Switch........................................................ 176
Alphabetical index
Side mirror
Adjusting and folding ..........................79
Mirror position memory ..................... 61
Smart access system with
push-button start
Entry function ..........................................32
Starting the engine.............................. 147
“SOS” button ......................................... 387
Spare tire
Inflation pressure ................................. 441
Storage location...................................513
Spark plug ............................................... 560
Specifications......................................... 552
Speedometer
Speed indicator......................................161
Speedometer ..........................................161
Steering wheel
Adjustment ...............................................76
Audio switches ...................................300
Steering wheel position
memory ................................................... 61
Storage feature..................................... 355
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes stuck.... 539
Sun visors .................................................362
Switch
All window control switch................82
ECT switch............................................. 152
Emergency flasher switch .............482
Engine switch.........................................147
Fog light switch ....................................180
Hazard light switch ...........................482
Ignition switch........................................147
Light switches ........................................176
Power door lock switch .................... 47
Power window switch ........................82
Roof switch...............................................86
Satellite switches................................ 365
Transmission shift
switches..................................... 153, 155
VSC off switch ......................................216
Window lock switch............................83
Wiper and washer switch............... 182
619
Alphabetical index
T
620
Tachometer
Tacho indicator...................................... 161
Tachometer ............................................. 161
Tail lights
Switch ........................................................176
Talk switch* .............................................326
Telephone switch*................................326
Theft deterrent system
Alarm ........................................................ 100
Engine immobilizer system .............98
Theft prevention labels ........................103
Tire inflation pressure .......................... 441
Tire information
Glossary.................................................579
Size ...........................................................576
Tire identification number .............575
Uniform tire quality grading......... 577
Tires
Chains ..................................................... 233
Checking .................................................431
If you have a flat tire............................513
Inflation pressure..................................441
Inflation pressure sensor................ 432
Information............................................573
Replacing.................................................513
Rotating tires ..........................................431
Run-flat tire............................................ 522
Size ...........................................................563
Snow tires.............................................. 233
Spare tire..................................................513
Tools............................................................ 513
Total load capacity ...............................232
Towing
Dinghy towing .................................... 238
Emergency towing........................... 483
Trailer towing .......................................237
TRAC ..........................................................214
Traction control.......................................214
Transmission shift switches...... 153, 155
Trip meter ................................................... 161
Trunk
Opener ....................................................... 51
Trunk light
Trunk light .................................................52
Wattage .................................................568
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.......................468
Switch........................................................158
Wattage .................................................568
U
USB port* ................................................ 287
V
Vanity lights
Vanity lights.......................................... 363
Wattage .................................................568
Vanity mirrors ........................................363
VDIM...........................................................214
Vehicle data recordings.........................21
Vehicle dynamics integrated
management .........................................214
Vehicle identification number.........553
Vehicle stability control .......................214
Ventilators.................................................371
Voice command switch*................... 327
VSC .............................................................214
Alphabetical index
W Warning buzzers
Brake system.........................................491
Open door .......................................... 493
Seat belt reminder ............................ 493
Warning lights
Anti-lock brake system .................. 492
Brake assist system .......................... 492
Brake system.........................................491
Charging system.................................491
Electric power steering system
warning light..................................... 492
Low fuel level....................................... 493
Malfunction indicator lamp .......... 492
Master warning light........................ 493
Open door ........................................... 493
Pre-collision system......................... 492
Pretensioners ...................................... 492
Seat belt reminder light .................. 493
SRS airbags.......................................... 492
Tire pressure warning
light........................................................ 493
Warning messages
Dynamic radar
cruise control ........................501, 503
Engine oil level....................................503
Engine oil maintenance..................503
Engine oil pressure.......................... 500
Hood .......................................................503
Intuitive parking assist ..........501, 503
Open door ...........................................503
Parking brake......................................503
Pre-collision system..............501, 503
Retractable hardtop..............501, 503
Smart access system with
push-button start .............................510
Steering lock..........................................501
Trunk ....................................................... 503
Washer fluid ........................................ 503
Washer
Checking .............................................. 430
Preparing and checking
before winter ....................................233
Switch........................................................ 182
Washing and waxing...........................396
Weight
Cargo capacity...................................229
Load limits .............................................232
Weight.....................................................552
Wheels ......................................................445
Window glasses ......................................82
Window lock switch ...............................83
Windows
Power windows.....................................82
Rear window defogger.................... 251
Washer .................................................... 182
Windshield wiper de-icer..................252
Windshield wipers................................. 182
Wireless remote control key
Replacing the battery.......................449
WMA disc* ...............................................271
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
621
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
P. 513
If you have a flat tire
P. 522
P. 524 If the engine will not start
The engine does not start
The shift lever cannot be
moved out
Engine immobilizer system
P. 532 If the vehicle battery is discharged
P. 98
P. 526
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P
The engine coolant temperature
gauge enters the red zone
P. 536 If your vehicle overheats
Steam can be seen coming
from under the hood
622
The key is lost
P. 527 If you lose your keys
The battery runs out
P. 532 If the vehicle battery is discharged
Doors
The doors cannot be locked
P. 47
The horn begins to sound
P. 100 Alarm
The vehicle is stuck in mud or
sand
P. 539 If the vehicle becomes stuck
A warning message is displayed
P. 500 If a warning message is displayed
What to do if...
A warning light or indicator
light comes on
P. 491
If a warning light turns on or a warning
buzzer sounds...
■Warning lights
Brake system warning light
or
Malfunction indicator lamp
or
P. 491
P. 492
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light
P. 493
“ABS” warning light
or
P. 492
Low fuel level warning light
P. 493
SRS warning light
P. 492
Open door warning light
P. 493
Charging system warning
light
P. 491
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
P. 493
Master warning light
P. 493
Electric power steering system
warning light
P. 492
Pre-collision system warning light
P. 492
Tire pressure warning light
P. 493
Slip indicator
P. 492
623
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever
P. 413
Hood lock release lever
P. 413
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
Fuel type
Cold tire inflation
pressure
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill 
reference)
Engine oil type
624
Trunk opener
P. 51
Fuel filler door
P. 95
Fuel filler door opener
P. 95
Tire inflation pressure
P. 563
17.2 gal. (65 L, 14.3 Imp. gal.)
Unleaded gasoline only
P. 96, 555
P. 563
Without filter
With filter
qt. (L, Imp. qt.)
6.2 (5.9, 5.2)
6.7 (6.3, 5.5)
P. 556
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement